Dxdesigner Ref
Dxdesigner Ref
Manual
Document Revision 5
This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation. The original recipient of this
document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only, provided that this entire
notice appears in all copies. In duplicating any part of this document, the recipient agrees to make every reasonable
effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function (see MG595892).
Use HTML for full navigation.
This document is for information and instruction purposes. Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make
changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice, and the
reader should, in all cases, consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been
made.
The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in
written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers. No representation or other affirmation
of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor
Graphics whatsoever.
MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS)
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT,
EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS: The software and documentation were developed entirely at
private expense and are commercial computer software and commercial computer software
documentation within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to
FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFARS 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure by or for the U.S.
Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in
the license agreement provided with the software, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable
mandatory federal laws.
TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") used herein are the property of
Mentor Graphics Corporation or other parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior
written consent of Mentor Graphics or the owner of the Mark, as applicable. The use herein of a third-
party Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product, but is intended to
indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A current list of Mentor Graphics’
trademarks may be viewed at: mentor.com/trademarks.
The registered trademark Linux® is used pursuant to a sublicense from LMI, the exclusive licensee of
Linus Torvalds, owner of the mark on a world-wide basis.
End-User License Agreement: You can print a copy of the End-User License Agreement from:
mentor.com/eula.
Author: In-house procedures and working practices require multiple authors for documents. All
associated authors for each topic within this document are tracked within the Mentor Graphics
Technical Publication’s source. For specific topic authors, contact Mentor Graphics Technical
Publication department.
Revision History: Released documents include a revision history of up to four revisions. For
earlier revision history, refer to earlier releases of documentation on Support Center.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
4 PADS® Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.7
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Support Files and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Introduction to the Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Design Entry Tool Support Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Support File Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Borders Initialization File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bus Contents File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Databook Tool Configuration File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
DxArchiver.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DxDesigner.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DxDesigner.xml File Format - OBJECTS Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DxDesigner.xml File Format - LAYERS Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DxDesigner.xml File Format - ICTOBJECTS Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DxDesigner.xml File Format - SETTINGS Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DxDesigner.xml File Format - SIZES Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
DxDesigner.xml File Format - Databook SETTINGS Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Part Lister Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
project.prj File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
PDF Writer Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Special Components File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chapter 2
Dialog Boxes and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Add Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Add Pin Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Add Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Archiver Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Array Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Cadence Allegro Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Change Border Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Column Chooser Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Component Definition Update Dialog Box - Component Definitions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Chapter 3
Design Entry Tool Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
icdbPartsLister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
DxArchiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
sch2pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
vdrc (Design Rule Checker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Chapter 4
Property Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Property Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Visibility Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Property Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Property Name and Value Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Property Definitions in a Netlist Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Netlist Interpretation of Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
User-Defined Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Multiple and Duplicate Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Multiple Property Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Property Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Chapter 5
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Illegal Characters in Name Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Unnamed Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Name Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Compound Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Unique Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Pin Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Bus Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Chapter 6
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Diagnostics Tool Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
DRC Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Appendix A
Supplemental Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Design Entry Tool COLORS Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
HyperLynx LineSim - Passives Prefixes - Models Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Pin (Port) Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Property Editing Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Verilog HDL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Verilog HDL Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Using Parameters in Verilog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Example VHDL Netlist Output File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
The QCV Netlist Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Search Query Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Third-Party Information
End-User License Agreement
with EDA Software Supplemental Terms
Support files control the configuration and appearance of the design entry tools. You can
customize many of the settings stored in these files from the design entry tool user interface, or
in the files themselves.
Introduction to the Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Design Entry Tool Support Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Support File Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Borders Initialization File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bus Contents File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Databook Tool Configuration File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DxArchiver.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DxDesigner.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Part Lister Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
project.prj File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
PDF Writer Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Special Components File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
You can customize the toolbars to show only the commands and icons you want to see. You can
also control window placement and visibility to organize your workspace.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files
Video
PADS Designer UI Introduction — Click to view a video demonstrating the basic user
interface capabilities.
Note
The Design Entry Tool Start Page — Click to view a short video demonstrating the Start
page capabilities.
Video
Toolbar Tooltips — Click to view a short video demonstrating the toolbar button tooltips.
Filename Description
addins.ini Stores the configuration of custom Add-ins.
borders.ini Stores schematic border assignment settings.
The source of the .ini file is the Setting - Borders and Zone dialog
box: Setup > Settings menu item, Project (category), Borders and
Zones (subcategory).
You specify the location of the .ini file from the Setup > Settings
(menu item), Project (category), Border Symbols (field).
For more information, see the following:
• “Borders Initialization File Format” on page 21
• “Controlling Sheet Borders” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
busconts.ini Stores schematic bus contents settings.
The source of the .ini file is the Settings - Bus Contents dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Bus Contents
(subcategory).
You specify the location of the .ini file from the Setup > Settings
(menu item), Project (category), Bus Contents (field).
For more information, see the following:
• “Bus Contents File Format” on page 26
• “Creating and Editing Predefined Buses” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files
Filename Description
<layout_system>.cfg files Stores the PCB interface configuration for the design entry and
layout tool.
For more information, see the following:
• “PCB Interface Configuration Files” in the PCB Interfaces
User’s Guide
Client.cfg Stores client configuration attributes for the Remote Server
Configuration Manager.
The location of the .cfg file is %WDIR%\iCDB\Client\Client.cfg.
For more information, see the following:
• “Client.cfg Configuration File” in the
Concurrent Design Administrator’s Guide
commontools.ini Stores custom Tools menu commands.
The source of the .ini file is the Customize Tools Menu dialog box:
Tools > Customize (menu item).
The location of the .ini file is \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard.
For more information, see the following:
• “Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box” on page 190
dashtools.ini Stores configuration of custom toolboxes of the Dashboard tool.
.dxc file Stores color definition schemes.
The source of the .dxc file is the Settings - Objects dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory).
.dbb file Stores base configuration settings for the Databook tool
configuration.
For more information, see the following:
• “Creating a Databook Configuration File” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• “Modifying a Databook Configuration File with the DBCtool
Utility” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide
.dbc file Stores configuration settings to connect the Databook tool to an
ODBC database.
For more information, see the following:
• “Databook Tool Configuration File Format” on page 28
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files
Filename Description
dxpdf.ini Stores PDF writer settings.
The source of the .ini file is the PDF Writer dialog box:
File > Export > PDF (menu item).
The location of this .ini file is \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard\dxpdf.ini. Any setting changes you make are
stored in a dxpdf.ini file of the project directory.
For more information, see the following:
• “Exporting Design Documentation in PDF Format” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
• “PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab” on page 262
DxArchiver.xml Stores project archive settings.
The source of the .xml file is the Archiver Wizard:
Tools > Archiver (menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “DxArchiver.xml File Format” on page 53
• “Project Archive” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
DxDesigner.xml Stores project settings.
The source of the .xml file is the Settings dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “DxDesigner.xml File Format” on page 55
DxDesigner.wsp Stores window placement configuration.
The location of the .wsp file the directory specified by the WDIR
environment variable. There are multiple versions of this file for
each project type, such as:
• DxDesignerNL.wsp — Netlist project
• DxDesignerPADS.wsp — Integrated PADS project
For more information, see the following:
“Saving and Restoring the Window Configuration” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
hdlutils.ini Stores VHDL and Verilog netlist export configuration.
The source of the .ini file the Settings - Export HDL dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Export
HDL(subcategory).
For more information, see the following:
• “Verilog Netlister Dialog Box” on page 424
• “VHDL Netlister Dialog Box” on page 425
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files
Filename Description
Launcher.cfg Stores configuration settings for the Client-Server Configuration
Manager.
The location of the .cfg file is %WDIR%\iCDB\Launcher\
Launcher.cfg.
For more information, see the following:
• “Launcher.cfg Configuration File” in the
Concurrent Design Administrator’s Guide
locmap.cfg Stores variable definitions of soft pathnames defined by the WDIR
environment variable.
<project_dir>/LogFiles/ Stores log files produced by design entry tools.
<tool>.log The location of the .log file is <project>\LogFiles\<tool>.log.
manifest.xml Stores the file set produced by the Archiver tool.
The source of the .xml file is the Archiver Wizard:
Tools > Archiver (menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “Project Archive” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
map.cfg Stores a map of pre-v2007 design entry tool attributes to the current
equivalent property names.
The design entry tool searches for the .cfg file in the following
locations in the following order:
1. Current project folder.
2. Each folder specified by the WDIR path, reading left-to-right.
For more information, see the following:
• “WDIR Variable Search Order” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide
NetlistVerify.ini Stores design rule check configuration settings for netlist type
Project Templates.
The source for the .ini file is the Verify dialog box: Tools > Verify
(menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format” on page 39
• “Verify Dialog Box” on page 419
• “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files
Filename Description
NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini Stores initial design rule check configuration settings for netlist type
Project Templates.
The location of the .ini file is \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard\ or %WDIR%.
For more information, see the following:
• “VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format” on page 39
• “Verify Dialog Box” on page 419
• “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
PathsMap.cfg Stores configuration settings for the Client-Server Configuration
Manager.
The location of the .cfg file is %WDIR%\iCDB\PathsMap.cfg.
<project>.prj Stores project-specific settings and configurations.
The source of the .prj file is the Settings dialog box:
Setup > Settings (menu item).
The location of the .prj file is in the project directory.
For more information, see the following:
• “DxDesigner.xml File Format” on page 55
• “Project Template File” in the
Concurrent Design Administrator’s Guide
scripts.ini Stores a list of scripts executed when the design entry tool starts.
The source of the .ini file is the Settings - Run on Startup dialog
box: Setup > Settings (menu item), Run on Startup (category).
scout.ini Stores cross reference (SCOUT) configuration settings.
The source of the .ini file is the cross reference (SCOUT) wizard:
Tools > Cross Reference (SCOUT) (menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “Sample Scout.ini File” in the Cross Referencing a Design
manual
Server.cfg Stores configuration settings for the Client-Server Configuration
Manager server.
The location of the .cfg file is %WDIR%\iCDB\Server\Server.cfg.
For more information, see the following:
• “Server.cfg Configuration File” in the
Concurrent Design Administrator’s Guide
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Support Files
Filename Description
speccomp.ini Stores special component symbol assignment settings.
The source of the .ini file is the Settings - Special Components
dialog box: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category),
Special Components (subcategory).
You specify the location of the .ini file from the Setup > Settings
(menu item), Project (category), Special Components
(subcategory).
For more information, see the following:
• “Special Components File Format” on page 156
usertools.ini Stores custom menu commands.
The source of the .ini file is the Customize dialog box:
Tools > Customize (menu item).
The location of the .ini file is either the WDIR environment variable
path or the project location.
For more information, see the following:
• “Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box” on page 190
Verify.ini Stores configuration settings of the Verify tool.
The source of the .ini file is the Verify dialog box: Tools > Verify
(menu item).
For more information, see the following:
• “VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format” on page 39
• “Verify Dialog Box” on page 419
• “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
VerifyDefaults.ini Stores initial configuration settings of the Verify tool.
The location of the .ini file is \<install_dir>\<release>\
SDD_HOME\standard or the WDIR path.
For more information, see the following:
• “VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format” on page 39
• “Verify Dialog Box” on page 419
• “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Related Topics
Read-only User-Preference Settings [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Support File Reference
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format
Format
The borders.ini file is composed of five sections.
[SYMBOLS]
This section defines a border symbol for specified sheet sizes and
orientation.
Syntax Example:
Sheet=symbol_name
In the syntax example, Sheet specifies the size and orientation of the
sheet, symbol_name is name of the border symbol
Example:
A0SHEETL=Borders:a0sheet.1 (Defines the symbol for landscape orientation)
A0SHEETP=Borders:a0sheet.2 (Defines the symbol for portrait orientation)
. . .
[ZONE A0SHEETL]
(A zone exists for each configured sheet.
A0SHEETL is used as an example to match the sheets defined above.)
(See the table entries for VerticalZones and HorizontalZones in the topic
“Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones” on page 330 for content of
this section)
. . .
[ATTRIBUTES]
This section defines a set of properties that is attached to each border
symbol instance when a border is added or changed.
Syntax Example:
property_name1=property_value1
property_name2=property_value2
Example:
DEVELOPER=Thomas
COMPANY=ACME
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format
[ANNOTATIONS]
This section describes the annotation format for links (from Setup >
Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference (subcategory). The
definition is stored here if it differs from the default form of the
following
Example:
FORMAT=$(sheet)-$(vzone)$(hzone)
[DEFAULTS]
This section defines default values for border properties.
Syntax Example:
property1=value1
property2=value2;value3;value4
Parameters
The tables list the setting names and describe the editable parameter values in each section of
the borders.ini file.
Table 1-1. borders.ini - ZONE <SHEET_TYPE> Section
Setting Name Setting Description
HORZLABELING Specifies whether numbers or letters are used to denote the horizontal
zones, and whether the numbers or letters are ascending or descending as
shown in the following:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones
Sheet Borders [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Support Files and Variables
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Bus Contents File Format
When PADS Designer loads a project, if a bus contents file for that project is specified in the
<design_name>.prj file, such as the following, the bus information contained in that file is
loaded into PADS Designer:
SECTION DesignInfo
. . .
KEY Bus_Contents “busconts.ini”
. . .
ENDSECTION
Parameters
• The contents of the 2007 and beyond busconts.ini file and the older conts.bc bus contents
file use similar formatting as follows:
Field Description
nA The maximum size of the bus net name field.
(Not used with the busconts.ini file)
mC The size of the bus contents field. m is less than 64K.
(Not used with the busconts.ini file)
bus_net_name The value of the Net Name text property you assign to the bus.
signal_name The signal names you assign, separated by a comma. The signal
names must be separated with a comma.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Bus Contents File Format
o When using signal names that contain spaces, all of the signal names must be
enclosed in double-quotes (“ ”).
Note
Although this is allowed, it is not a recommended practice.
CPU_BUS ADR[0:15],DATA[0:8],CTL[0:3],&
CPU_BUS INAP[0:25],ADV[0:7]
MEM_BUS "ADR[0:10],CONTROL[10:20],NETNAME WITH SPACE"
Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Creating and Editing Predefined Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
Note
Editing the .dbc file may require deleting component libraries associated with the Data
Source Name (DSN) and adding libraries back to the file.
Format
A .dbc file must conform to the following formatting restrictions:
• File sections appear in a specific order (see Table 1-3 on page 29):
1. Declaration Statement
2. dbc Element
3. CObject
4. CConfigSym
5. CConfigLib
6. CConfigLibEntry
7. CConfigAtt
8. CConfigTable
9. CConfigPref
10. CConfigScripting
11. End Statement
• File content is case-sensitive.
Standard XML file syntax is as shown here:
For example:
<element>
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
</element>
All XML file elements need to be numbered in order of appearance in the file.
For example,
<element1><element2><element3><element3><element4><element4><element1>
<element5><element5><element1>
See the Examples section in this topic for a sample of an XML file containing nested and
numbered elements.
Table 1-3. XML File Structure
File Section Example Value Description
Declaration <?xml version="1.0" The file begins with a standard
Statement encoding="UTF-8"?> XML declaration that includes a
UTF-8 encoding statement.
dbc Element <dbc version="1.0"> The dbc element is the top-level or
main element of the XML file with
version number as its attribute (this
element contains all of the other
file elements/subelements).
CObject <CObject0 overallSchema="21" CObject contains the Databook
flag="DX Databook Overlay main configuration (CConfig
Configuration File" element) and internal window data
BaseConfigurationURL=""> (CObList element).
<CConfig1> Note: Do not modify the
... CObList element or its
attributes.
</CConfig1>
<CObList128 CPersistList="0"/>
</CObject0>
CConfigSym <CConfigSym2> CConfigSym contains the list of
<CObArray3 symbols and it is a subelement of
CXMLTypedPtrArraySize="0"/> CConfig.
</CConfigSym2> Note: CConfigSym cannot be
used to store symbols.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
Parameters
Table 1-4. Element/Subelement Attributes
Element/Subelement Attribute Description
CConfigAtt UseCentralLibraryS Symbol data from Central Library is used.
ymbols="0" Values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled).
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
Examples
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<dbc version="1.0">
<CObject0>
<CConfig1>
<CConfigSym2>
<CObArray3/>
</CConfigSym2>
</CConfig1>
<CObList4/>
</CObject0>
</dbc>
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format
Related Topics
Databook Configuration File Overview [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
You can modify an .ini file to set up your own DRC Verify tool default settings to do the
following:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<VDRC>
<FlowType Name="<name>" />
<!--In NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini, Name=Netlist -->
<Checks>
<!-- See “DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File” on page 48 -->
</Checks>
<Defines>
<!-- See “DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File” on page 46 -
->
</Defines>
<GUI>
<!-- See “DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File” on page 41-->
</GUI>
</VDRC>
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Note
The NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini and VerifyDefaults.ini are similar. Values may vary slightly
for some checks.
Warning
Incorrect XML syntax in a VerifyDefaults.ini file could cause the design entry tool to hang
when starting Tools > Verify.
Parameters
None.
Related Topics
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
<Defines>
<Option Name="ground_nets" Value="AGND CGND GND +0V* E FG AG E0V* G0V*
A0V*"/>
<!-- ground_nets is used by checks:
OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116)
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204)
PowerValueCheck (drc-205)
NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
PowerGroundPinConnection (drc-511)
BusTranscPin (drc-603)
OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->
<Option Name="power_nets"
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
ICDevice (drc-601)
OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->
<Option Name="serials" Value="" />
<!-- serials is used by check:
Un-loaded net (drc-103)
Un-driven Net (drc-105)
Multiple Output Drivers (drc-106)
Un-driven component pins connected together (drc-111) -->
Parameters
• The OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116) can pass Values specified in a ground_nets and
power_nets definition in the .ini file <Defines> section to the DRC, as shown here:
<Option Name="ground_nets" Value="GND +0V* E FG AG E0V* G0V*
A0V*"/>
<Option Name="power_nets" Value="VCC +2.5V* -2.5V*"/>
• You can use other Option Name definitions to indicate to certain rules checks which
schematic objects the DRC should evaluate. This type of option specifies a user-defined
value that corresponds to a property name on a schematic object. For example, the following
supply_pin definition specifies a value of “DRC Supply Pin”.
<Option Name="supply_pin" Value="DRC Supply Pin" />
• If you define a “DRC Supply Pin” property in your design and place the property on a net,
the checks SupNegConnected (drc-505), SupNotConnected (drc-506), and
SupWrongConnected (drc-507), if selected, evaluate that net.
Note
You or an administrator can modify the Values in the .ini <Defines> section to suit
each site. For example, you can change the Value in the supply_pin definition from
“DRC Supply Pin” to “Supply Pin Check”. You can then create a property named
“Supply Pin Check” and place it on a schematic object(s). However, you must not
modify the Option Name “supply_pin”.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Figure 1-4. DRC Verify Tool Settings Pane - Settings Section as it Relates to UI
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Parameters
None.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
1. ID — Specifies an ID number.
2. State — Presets the checkbox as either Enabled (checked) or Disabled (unchecked).
3. Severity — Presets the Severity level as either Note, Warning, or Error.
4. GUI — Defines the Rule title that appears on the GUI.
5. Description — Text defined here appears at the bottom of the dialog box when a check
is selected.
6. Option text — Defines the Option title that appears on the GUI.
7. Option Value — Preset the value(s) in the Values column, or leave this out of the Check
Name definition if there are no values.
8. Option GuiObject (edit) — If set to “edit”, an edit box appears when you click on the
value.
9. Option Value — In Figure 1-5, this option value is the default setting for one of the
choices provided.
10. Option GuiObject (combobox)— If set to “combobox”, a dropdown list is available to
set the value.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Figure 1-5. Verify Tool Rules Pane - Defaults File Checks Section as it Relates
to UI
Parameters
None.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
Figure 1-6. DRC Rules Pane - Defaults File Rules Section as it Relates to UI
The following items explain the .ini file sections shown in Figure 1-6:
1. The <Rules> section of the .ini file defines the group name(s). This example defines the
first group as “Migration”.
2. Migration group checks reference Check Names, as defined in the <Checks> section.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)
3. If you include the string State=”Enabled” in the Rules section, it overrides the State
declaration in the Checks section of the .ini file for a given check. This example shows
the PropertyUnsupported check disabled in the Checks section, yet it is enabled in the
Rules section. As seen in the UI (Figure 1-6), this check is enabled.
4. The second group specified in the Rules section is titled “Connectivity”.
Parameters
None.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxArchiver.xml File Format
The lines that define configuration settings in the DxArchiver.xml file have the following
format:
Note
You should change only the value of a setting_value string in the DxArchiver.xml file. You
should never modify the setting_name string.
Parameters
Table 1-5. DxArchiver.xml Parameters
Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
The Options section specifies parameters of the archive operation.
Compression Type Specifies the file compression type of the project archive using
the following values:
• None — No compression. Default.
• Zip — Zip format file
DxProject Path Specifies the location of the project file.
PDF Type Specifies whether to output a PDF format file as part of the
project archive:
• 0 — Do not output a PDF format file. Default.
• 1 — Output a PDF format file.
SetSTATIC Specifies whether to change physical planes from Dynamic to
Static:
• 0 — Do not change physical planes. Default.
• 1 — Change physical planes.
TargetDirectory Path Specifies the location of the target directory of the project
archive.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxArchiver.xml File Format
Examples
Figure 1-7. DxArchiver.xml File
Related Topics
DxArchiver
Archiver Wizard
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Format
The DxDesigner.xml file is an ASCII file that uses standard XML formatting. The file content is
divided into major sections as shown in Figure 1-8.
The lines that define configuration settings in the DxDesigner.xml file have the following
format:
Note
All objects allow the readonly=”1” option. Not all key names allow the readonly=”1”
setting. Read-only compatibility is indicated in the key name descriptions in these topics.
For more information, see “Read-only User-Preference Settings” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Parameters
• The following topics list the setting names and describes the editable parameter values in
each section of the DxDesigner.xml file:
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - OBJECTS Section” on page 57
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - LAYERS Section” on page 61
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - ICTOBJECTS Section” on page 64
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - SETTINGS Section” on page 65
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - SIZES Section” on page 125
o “DxDesigner.xml File Format - Databook SETTINGS Section” on page 128
Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables
Read-only User-Preference Settings [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
DxDesigner.xml File Precedence Order [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Arguments
• COLOR
Sets the color of each object using an RGB hex value. The default values for each defined
object are as follows:
0xffff00 — ATTRIBUTE (Property), BUS, LABEL (Name), WIRE, WIRE_BUS
0x00ffff — ARC, BOX, CIRCLE, COMPONENT, LINE, PIN, POLYGON, TEXT
0x9eb8cf — DOCUMENT_CONTAINER
0xff6820 — FRAME
0x00ff00 — NET
0x8b728f — BLOCK
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory)
• FILL_STYLE
Sets the fill style of each object using the following values:
0 — Hollow. Default for BOX, CIRCLE, COMPONENT,
DOCUMENT_CONTAINER, LINE, PIN, POLYGON, and WIRE.
1 — Solid. Default for BUS, NET, WIRE_BUS, and BLOCK.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
2 — Diagdn1
3 — Diagdn2
4 — Grey08
5 — Diagdn2
6 — Diagup1
7 — Horiz
8 — Vert
9 — Grid2
10 — Grid1
11 — X2
12 — X1
13 — Grey50
14 — Grey92
15 — Grey04
Fill style settings are not applicable (set to -1 by the design entry tool) to the following
objects: ARC, ATTRIBUTE (Property), FRAME, LABEL (Name), WIRE, and
TEXT.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Schematic (option)
• LINE_STYLE
Sets the line style of each object using the following values:
1— Dash
2 — Center
3 — Phantom
4 — Big dash
5 — Dot
6 — Dash-Dot
7 — Medium Dash
Line style settings are not applicable to the following objects:
ATTRIBUTE (Property), LABEL (Name), and TEXT.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI:Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Schematic (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• SELECTABLE
Defines selection filter behavior as follows:
1 — The object is selectable. Default for BLOCK.
0 — The object is filtered from the selection and cannot be selected. Default for all
objects except BLOCK.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI:View > Other Windows > Selection Filter
• VISIBLE
Sets object visibility state as follows:
0 — Not visible.
1 — Visible. Default for all objects.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI:
o View > Other Windows > Selection Filter
o For ATTRIBUTE (Property) objects — Setup > Settings (menu item), Display
(category), Common Properties (option)
o For TEXT objects — Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Graphical
Text (option)
o For LABEL (Name) objects — Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category),
Name (option)
• LINE_THICKNESS
Sets line thickness to a value between 1 and 10.
1 — Thinnest line width. Default for all objects except BLOCK.
7 — Default for BLOCK.
10 — Thickest line width.
Line thickness settings are not applicable to the following objects: ATTRIBUTE (Property),
BUS, COMPONENT, DOCUMENT_CONTAINER, LABEL (Name), PIN, and TEXT
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory)
• FILL_COLOR
Sets the color of each object using an RGB hex value. The default value for each defined
object is set as follows:
o 0xffff00 — ATTRIBUTE (Property), BUS, LABEL (Name), WIRE, WIRE_BUS
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Arguments
• COLOR
Sets the color of each layer using an RGB hex value. The default values for each defined
layer are set as follows:
0xffffff — SELECTION_LAYER, ZONES_LAYER (Border/Grid Zones),
ZONING_LAYER (Sheet Zoning Grid)
0x00ffff — BORDER_LAYER
0xc0c0c0 — VALUE_LAYER, UNPLACEDCOMPONENT_LAYER
0xffff00 — ANNOTATION_LAYER,CROSS_REFERENCE_LAYER
0xff00ff — HIGHLIGHT_LAYER
0x000000 — BACKGROUND_LAYER
0x3a3a3a — GRID_LAYER
xffaaaa — DYNAMIC_SELECTION_LAYER
0x00ff00 — DRAG_LAYER (Selection)
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Schematic (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• FILL_STYLE
Sets the fill style of each layer using the following values:
0 — Hollow.
1 — Solid. Default for HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
2 — Diagdn1
3 — Diagdn2
4 — Grey08
5 — Diagdn2
6 — Diagup1
7 — Horiz
8 — Vert
9 — Grid2
10 — Grid1
11 — X2
12 — X1
13 — Grey50
14 — Grey92
15 — Grey04
Fill style settings are not applicable for any layers except the HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Schematic (option)
• LINE_STYLE
Sets the line style of each layer using the following values:
0 — Solid. Default for HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
1 — Dash
2 — Center
3 — Phantom
4 — Big dash
5 — Dot
6 — Dash-Dot
7 — Medium Dash
Line style settings are not applicable for any layers except the HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Arguments
• COLOR
Sets the color of each object using an RGB hex value. The default values for each defined
object are as follows:
0xfffbf0 — Default for ICTBLOCK (View), ICTBUS, ICTCOMPONENT (Block),
ICTDIFFPAIR, ICTEDITCELL, ICTFPGA, ICTFUB (Editable Block), ICTNET,
ICTNETS (Global Net), ICTPIN, ICTPORT, ICTSYMBOL.
0xa6caf0 — Default for ICTGROUP.
0xffffce — Default for ICTHIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
0xb0b0b0 — Default for ICTINVALIDCELL.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), ICT (option)
• TEXTCOLOR
Sets the text color of each ICT object using an RGB hex value. The default value for all ICT
objects is as follows:
0x000000
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), ICT (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Arguments
• ABSOLUTE_OATS
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ADD_PROPERTIES_HINT_TAG
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ADD_PROPERTIES_HINT_TAG_TIMER
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ADISTANCE
Obsolete. Use ADISTANCE_HR.
• ADISTANCE_HR
Avoidance distance - high resolution. (Available only when Avoidance Routing is active:
=2.) Sets the minimum distance between nets and components or other nets.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of 5.08mm
or 0.20in appears in the file as 508000 (5.08mm * 100,000).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Avoidance Distance (option)
• ANALOG_SIMULATION_MODE
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• ANNO_CONDENSED_SEP
If the ANNO_USE_CONDENSED option is on (value=1), then you can specify the
separator (default = /) used between multiple link designators when a link goes to more than
one destination such as: 3-G4/D10/G9.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Condensed Separator (option)
• ANNO_DISABLE_ON_PORTS
Sets whether cross reference data is annotated onto the hierarchical ports of a hierarchical
design, as follows:
0 — Annotate cross reference data.
1 — Do not annotate cross reference data (Disable).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Disable Annotations On Ports (option)
• ANNO_LOC_OFFSET_X
Sets cross reference annotation text X-offset placement based on the annotation origin point
in the specified units. A positive number offsets the text to the right, a negative number
offsets the text to the left. Default: 0.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. A value of 1.143e+006 sets
the offset to 11.43mm, or .45in.
Can be set to Read-only?: Yes
To access from the GUI:Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), X-Offset (option)
• ANNO_LOC_OFFSET_Y
Sets cross reference annotation text Y-offset placement based on the annotation origin point
in the specified units. A positive number offsets the text vertically up, a negative number
offsets the text vertically down. Default: 0.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
A value of 762000 sets the offset to 7.62mm, or .3in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Y-Offset (option)
• ANNO_LOC_SPACING
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• ANNO_MAX_LENGTH
Sets the maximum length (in characters) of the cross reference annotation. Default: 20.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Max Line Length (option)
• ANNO_ORIGIN
Sets the cross reference annotation text origin point (or none) for the as one of the following:
0 — None. Default.
1 — Upper left
2 — Middle left
3 — Lower left
4 — Upper center
5 — Middle center
6 — Lower center
7 — Upper right
8 — Middle right
9 — Lower right
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Annotation Origin (option)
• ANNO_SEP
Specifies a separator that appears between multiple cross-reference link designators when a
link goes to more than one destination such as 2-B7;3-G4;3-D10;3-GS. Default: semi-colon
(“;”).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Separator (option)
• ANNO_SIZE
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ANNO_SIZE_HR
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• ANNO_USE_CONDENSED
Sets the cross reference annotation text to use either condensed format or non-condensed
format when a link points to multiple destinations. Default: condensed format.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• AUTOLABELING_NETS
Controls whether the design entry tool names new nets automatically, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool does not name nets automatically. Default.
1 — The design entry tool names nets automatically based on the rules described in the
following:
“Naming Connectivity Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Nets (subcategory), Name New Nets Automatically (option)
• AUTOLABELING_BUSES
Controls whether the design entry tool names new buses automatically, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool does not name buses automatically. Default.
1 — The design entry tool names buses automatically based on the rules described in the
following:
“Naming Connectivity Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Nets (subcategory), Name New Buses Automatically (option)
• AUTO_CONNECT_NEW_TAP
Sets the ICT power supply tap autoconnect behavior, as follows:
0 — Turn off power supply tap autoconnect.
1 — If set prior to placing a tap in an Interconnectivity Table(Add > Poweror
Add > Ground), creates the connection to the corresponding global net (given by the
value of the tap symbol property “Global Signal Name”). The global net is eventually
added if it does not already exist. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Power supply tap autoconnect (option)
• AUTO_RIPPER_BUS_SEGMENT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• AUTO_RIPPER_BUS_SEGMENT_LENGTH_HR
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• AUTO_TEXT_ORIEN
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• AUTOLOG
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• AUTOMATICALLY_PROPAGATE_NET_NAMES
Controls the behavior of connector pin naming when connecting a net to a connector, as
follows:
0 — You can use different names between nets and associated connectors. Default.
1 — The design entry tool automatically synchronizes the net name with the connector
pin name no matter which name changes.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category),
Automatically synchronize on-sheet/off-links and net names (option)
• AUTOMATICALLY_SYNCHRONIZE_FUB_PORT_NAME_TYPE
Note
You must have a special component defined for any Pin Type that you want to use as
a port.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• BEGIN_NETS_IN_SPACE
Controls how nets are places on the schematic, as follows:
0 — Nets can only start at a component pin or at a junction with another net.
1 — Enables nets to start anywhere. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
• BELL
Obsolete.
• BIGCROSS
Obsolete.
• BITNUMBERS
Control the display of bit numbers on a ripped bus, as follows:
0 — Do not show bit numbers on a ripped bus. Default.
1 — Show bit numbers on a ripped bus.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Show
Ripper Indexes (option)
• BLOCKTYPE
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• BORDERON
Controls the visibility of the schematic border shown in Figure 2-56 on page 331. This is not
referring to a border symbol.
0 — Hides the schematic border.
1 — Displays the schematic border. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Border
(option)
• BORDERZONES
Controls the visibility of the schematic zoning grid border label shown in Figure 2-56 on
page 331.
0 — Hides the zoning grid border label. Default.
1 — Displays the zoning grid border label.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Zone Labels
(section), Border (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• BOXSIZE
Obsolete. Use BOX_SIZE_HR.
• BOXSIZE_HR
Sets the drawing size (radius) of all boxes on dangling joints.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of 127000
sets the size to 1.27mm, or 0.050in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Box Size
[<Units>] (option)
• BUBBLESIZE
Obsolete. Use BUBBLESIZE_HR.
• BUBBLESIZE_HR
Sets the size of the bubble on inverted pins.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of 127000
sets the size to 1.27mm, or 0.050in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Inverted
Pin Bubble Size [<Units>] (option)
• BUS
Obsolete.
• BUS_DOTSIZE
Obsolete. Use BUS_DOTSIZE_HR.
• BUS_DOTSIZE_HR
Sets the drawing size (radius) of all net solder dots.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 305000 sets the size to 3.05mm, or 0.120in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item) Advanced (category), Bus Dot
Size [<Units>] (option)
• BUS_MODE
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• BUSWIDTH
Obsolete. Use the LINE_THICKNESS option in the BUS object in the OBJECTS section.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• BUSWIDTH_HR
Obsolete. Use the LINE_THICKNESS option in the BUS object in the OBJECTS section.
• CHANGE_TO_ALLOW_MULTIPLE_TYPES
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CHECK_COMP_DATES
Controls the design entry tool behavior with out-of-date symbols, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool does not flag out-of-date symbols.
1 — Enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date symbols. The software compares
the symbol in the host design and central library to ensure they are the same. If the
time/date stamp of the symbol is different from that in the host design, the design
entry tool places a magenta box around the out-of-date symbol. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Flag out-
of-date symbols (option)
• CHECK_REUSEBLOCK_DATES
Controls the design entry tool behavior with out-of-date managed blocks, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool does not flag out-of-date managed blocks. Default.
1 — Enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date managed blocks. The software
compares the managed block in the host design and central library to ensure they are
the same. If the time/date stamp of the managed block symbol is different from that in
the host design, the design entry tool places a magenta box around the out-of-date
managed block.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Flag out-
of-date Managed Blocks (option)
• COARSE_GRID
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• COMPONENT_TOOLTIPS
Controls the visibility of component tooltips (labels and properties) on schematics, as
follows:
0 — Hide component tooltips.
1 — Display component tooltips. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Show tooltips
(section), Components (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• COMPTEXTON
Sets symbol text visibility on schematics as one of the following:
0 — Hide symbol text.
1 — Display symbol text on schematics. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Symbol Text
(option)
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONSTRAINT
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONTEXT_WINDOW
Obsolete.
• CONTINUE_ROLLBACK_DECISION
Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
• CONTINUE_REMOVE_ALL_BACKUPS_DECISION
Controls whether to provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in the current
project.
0 — Provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in the current project. Default.
4 — Do not provide warning.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
• CONTINUE_REMOVE_BOARD_BACKUPS_DECISION
Controls whether to provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in the current
board.
0 — Provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in the current board. Default.
4 — Do not provide warning.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• CROSS_REFERENCE_SIZE_HR
Sets the size of cross reference text. Default: 381000.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 381000 sets the offset to 3.81mm, or .15in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Cross
Reference (subcategory), Text Size (option)
• CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_NAMES
Stores the schematic editor selection filter’s Custom Filter names.
This key name consists of multiple <value> lines, one corresponding to each custom filter
<value> line listed in the CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_OBJECTS. The first <value>
line corresponds to the first line listed in the Custom Selection Filter Objects list, the second
<value> line corresponds to the second item listed in the Custom Selection Filter Objects
list, and so on.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_OBJECTS
Controls the custom selection filter settings represented by the following values:
This key name consists of multiple <value> lines; one line per custom filter listed in the
CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_NAMES (Custom Filters) list. The first <value> line
corresponds to the first item listed in the Custom Filter list, the second <value> line
corresponds to the second item listed in the Custom Filter list, and so on.
For each <value> line, activate the objects you want in that particular filter by adding the
appropriate values, separated by spaces (see the following default custom filter definitions).
Default Custom Filter Definitions:
<value>0 1 3 4</value> (Graphics)
<value>5 7 9 26 27</value> (Objects)
<value>2 6 8</value> (Text)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• DATETIME_FORMAT
Set the @DATETIME property format using the following variables and separator
characters (most common are / and : ):
%d — day
%m — month
%Y — year as four digits
%y — year as two digits
%H — hour
%M — minutes
%S — seconds
Default: %d/%m/%Y:%H:%M
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Date Format
(dropdown list option)
• DB_AUTO_BACKUP
Controls whether sheets and ICTs are backed up each time you open them.
0 — Do not backup sheets and ICTs. Default.
1 — Backup sheets and ICTs each time you open them.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
See also: DB_BACKUPS_LIMIT
• DB_BACKUPS_LIMIT
Set the number of sheet/ICT backups to save before overwriting them. The tool uses this
option if DB_AUTO_BACKUP is set to 1 (on). Set the value to between 4 and 20. If you
keep the default of 0, the design entry tool saves all backups without overwriting older ones.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
See also: DB_AUTO_BACKUP
• DB_ERR_VERBOSE
Sets the SCH/SYM parser database validation to display one of the following in the design
entry tool:
0 — Tallies the number of messages when done reading the design.
1 — Generates all error/warning messages. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• DBOXON
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• DEFAULT_VALUE_UPPER
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• DEFAULT_ZOOM
Sets the Pan and Zoom behavior to the PADS Designer configuration:
0 — Turns off the PADS Designer style pan and zoom.
1 — Turns on the PADS Designer style pan and zoom. Default.
Note
The tool uses this setting in conjunction with EXPEDITION_ZOOM and
PADS_ZOOM. Only one of these should be set to 1 (on) at a time.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• DEF_USESHEET1
If DEFMETHOD=1, this setting lets you choose to use either the same user-configurable
border for all sheets, or a different border for the first sheet in a design, as follows:
0 — Do not use the sheet 1 border for new sheets. Default.
1 — Use the sheet 1 border for new sheets.
Rules:
o This setting has no effect on a top level schematic. You use this setting to specify
which border to use on the first sheet of a new schematic when you push into a
composite component.
o If you select this setting, the tool uses the border specified in Border for Sheet 1 on
the first sheet of the underlying schematic.
o If you clear this setting (value=0), the tool uses the border specified in Border for
Sheet 2-N on all sheets, including sheet 1.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Use sheet 1 border for underlying schematics (option)
• DETAIL
Controls how the design capture tool displays objects during object manipulation operations
as one of the following:
0 — The design capture tool displays a bounding box, which represents the object until
the operation is complete.
1 — The design capture tool continually displays objects while you are performing
operations, such as: adding, pasting, moving, copying, or rotating. Default.
Tip: Leaving this option on (value=1) slows down object movement. If you find the speed
of object operations slow, change this option setting.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
• DISPLAY_FULL_SIGNAL_NAME_ON_RIPPER
Controls how the design entry tool displays net names when you rip nets from a bus, as
follows:
o 0 — Displays only the ripper index value. Default.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Prerequisite:
BITNUMBERS=1 must be set before you can display the ripped net name.
For more information, see the following:
“Connectivity With Buses” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Use Full
Bus Name on Ripper (option)
• DISPLAY_REUSEBLOCK_WORK
Obsolete.
• DOTSIZE
Obsolete. Use DOTSIZE_HR.
• DOTSIZE_HR
Sets the drawing size (radius) of all net connection dots. The design entry tool determines
the connection dot size from the radius setting and the net linewidth.
You need to enter a radius value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of
63500 sets the increment to 0.635mm, or 0.025in.
If the net has a linewidth=1, the design entry tool displays the connection dot using the
radius value (0.025” in the second example in the following figure.)
If the net has a linewidth>1, the design entry tool increases the connection dot size
according to the net size. The design entry tool adds the radius value to the net line edge as
shown in the first example in the following figure:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Dot Size
[<Units>] (option)
• DOTSIZE_THREE_SEGMENTS
Obsolete.
• DOTSIZE_THREE_SEGMENTS_HR
Obsolete.
• DXD_ALTERA_EXECUTABLE_OATH
Specifies the path to the Altera folder that contains the executable. Default: null string (“ ”).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), FPGA Tools (subcategory), Altera Executable Path (option)
• DXD_CLEAR_LIBRARY_BEFORE_INIT
Controls what actions need to happen before simulation initialization, as follows:
True — You do not need to run the Simulation > Clean command ( ) manually
before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
False — Before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation, you need to run the
Simulation > Clean command manually. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Delete Design Units from HDL Design
(option)
• DXD_COMPILE_BEFORE_INIT
Controls what actions need to happen before simulation initialization, as follows:
True — You do not need to run the Simulation > Compile command ( ) manually
before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
False — Before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation you need to run the
Simulation > Compile command manually. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Compile Files (option)
• DXD_CURRENT_FPGA_TOOL
Specifies which FPGA tool you want to execute (Xilinx or Altera). Default: null string (“ ”).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), FPGA Tools (subcategory), Current Tool (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• DXD_DIAGNOSTICS_RUN_ON_CLOSE
Sets the design entry tool to run the automatic Diagnostics tool when the session exits.
0 — Does not run the Diagnostics tool. Default.
1 — Runs the Diagnostics tool when the design entry tool closes.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Diagnostics (category), Execute
Diagnostics on exit (option)
• DXD_ENABLE_EXTERNAL_EDITOR
Controls the design entry tool edit mode if the <proj_name>.prj file specifies a valid
DedicatedServerName, as follows:
False — Sets the session so that the first designer to open a sheet does not get read-write
access to the sheet. The sheet opens in read-only mode. The first designer who clicks
the Click to Edit button gets read-write access to the sheet.
True — Sets the session so that the first designer to open a sheet gets read-write access.
Any subsequent designer opening the same sheet gets read-only access.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Enable edit
mode for opened sheets (option), or Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA
Integration (category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Use External Text Editor
(option)
For more information, see “The Multi-User Environment” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
• DXD_ENABLE_START_PAGE
Controls whether the PADS Designer Start Page displays when you invoke the tool, as
follows:
0 — Does not display the Start Page.
1 — Displays the Start Page. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• DXD_EXPORT_BEFORE_INIT
Controls what actions need to happen before simulation initialization, as follows:
True — You do not need to run the Simulation > Export HDL Files command ( )
manually before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
False — Before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation you must run
Simulation > Export HDL Files manually. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Export HDL Files (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• DXD_EXPORT_BEFORE_TOOL_LAUNCH
Controls whether to export HDL files when you run the Launch FPGA tool, as follows:
True — Exports HDL files when you run the Launch FPGA Tool the Launch FPGA
tool.
False — Does not export HDL files when you run the Launch FPGA tool. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), FPGA Tools (subcategory), Export Before Launch (option)
• DXD_EXTERNAL_EDITOR_EXECUTABLE
If the DXD_ENABLE_EXTERNAL_EDITOR setting is set to True, use this setting to
provide a path to your own text editor instead of using the one the design entry tool
provides. Default: null string (“ ”).
In addition to the path to the executable, include the parameter $(File) as in the following
example to enable the design entry tool to start the editor on the correct HDL file:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File)
If your text editor invocation supports a second argument to invoke on a specific line
number, you can add the argument $(Line) as in the following example:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File) $(Line)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• DXD_SIMULATOR_USE_EXTERNAL
Controls what actions need to happen before simulation initialization, as follows:
True — Use the ModelSim User Interface (UI) to set up and run the simulation instead
of the PADS Designer UI.
False — PADS Designer provides a dialog box to set up and run the simulation. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Use External ModelSim (option)
• DXD_XILINX_EXECUTABLE_PATH
Enter the path to the Altera folder that contains the executable. Default = null string (“”)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), HDL/FPGA Integration
(category), FPGA Tools (subcategory), Xilinx Executable Path (option)
• DXDB_HIDE_CL_VIEW
Controls whether the central library view is visible in Databook when a .dbc configuration
file is loaded:
0 — The central library view is visible in Databook. Default.
1 — The central library view is not visible in Databook.
Can be set to Read-only? No
• DXDLITE_SHOW_EXPIRATION_WARNING_LEVEL
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• DXDIAG_ON_DB_UPGRADE
Controls the design entry tool behavior before opening a project that was created with an
earlier version of PADS Designer, as follows:
0 — Do not run Tools > Diagnostics before opening an updated project. Default.
1 — Before opening a project that was created with an earlier version of
PADS Designer, PADS Designer automatically runs Tools > Diagnostics after
successfully updating the project to the current version of PADS Designer.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Run
Diagnostics after update (option)
• DYNAMIC_PANNING
Controls dynamic panning, as follows:
0 — Do not use middle mouse button to pan the schematic.
1 — Use middle mouse button to pan the schematic. Default.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note
This setting is used in conjunction with DEFAULT_ZOOM and PADS_ZOOM.
Only one of these should be set to 1 (on) at a time.
Note
If you change the setting from On to Off after you have added text, any text
appearing in the 180 degree state or the 270 degree state (as shown on the left in the
example above) changes to the equivalent state as shown at the right in the example
when you apply the new setting.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• GRC_DESIGN_SCOPE
Sets the Graphical Rule Checker scope as one of the following:
Project. Default.
Board
Schematic
Sheet
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: GRC button ( )
• GRC_ISSUE_SCOPE
Configures the Graphical Rules Checker rule defaults that appear in the Setup > Settings
menu item, Graphical Rules Checker category. The construction of each line is, as
follows:
<value> 0 (checked) or 1 (unchecked): {rule_name}:{severity}:{value} </value>
The following shows the default settings:
<key name="GRC_ISSUE_SCOPE">
<value>1:Net overlap:Note</value>
<value>0:Object overlap:Note</value>
<value>1:Net off grid:Note</value>
<value>1:Pin off grid:Note</value>
<value>1:Text owner:Note:1.2in</value>
<value>1:Text alignment:Note</value>
</key>
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Pins dropdown list display (section), Pin number (option)
• ICE_SLICEANDDICE_NETS_SHOW_MODE
Sets the ICT Slice and Dice nets choices as one of the following:
0 — Show only nets connected between the components of Slice and Dice. Default.
1 — Show nets connected between and to the components of Slice and Dice.
2 — Show all nets.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Slice and Dice (subcategory)
• ICE_SYMBOL_FORMAT
Select how Symbol label(s) appear in the Interconnectivity Table using any combination of
the following variables:
$(Name)
$(Symbol)
$(Ref Designator)
Default: $(Name)$(Symbol).
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, and
colon.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Symbol label format (option)
• ICT_HIDE_NOTCOMMON_PRP
Show only common properties in ICT viewer.
0 — Shows all properties. Default.
1 — Shows only common properties.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Interconnectivity Table
(category), Properties (subcategory), Show Common Properties Only (checkbox)
• IMPORT_PADSPE_CL_PATH
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• KEYBINDINGS
Control the design entry tool key bindings, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool uses default key bindings.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
1 — The design entry tool uses PADS Layout-style Key Bindings. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI:Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Xpedition
Style Keybindings (option)
For more information, see “Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes” on page 427.
• LABELBRACKETS
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• LABELON
Obsolete
• LABELTHRESHOLD
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• LABEL_ON_SPLIT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• LANGUAGE
Set the User Interface language to one of the following:
Default
ENG — English
JPN — Japanese
PTB — Portuguese
CHN — Chinese
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Language
(option)
• LINE_GRID
If GRIDON is set to 1, LINE_GRID sets the active schematic or symbol window grid
display, as follows:
Dotted — Grid is displayed as dotted lines.
Lined — Grid is displayed as solid lines. Default.
The grid lines or dots display as one line per grid interval defined by GRID_HR (Grid
Spacing).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Grid Type (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• LONG_LINE_ERRORS
Set the maximum number of characters allowed in an error/warning message.
Default: 127
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• MIDSTROKE
If STROKES is on (value=1), this setting determines which mouse button you use to draw
predefined patterns in the schematic window to execute commands or functions, as follows:
0 — You draw strokes with the right mouse button. Default.
1 — You draw strokes with the middle mouse button.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Strokes, Pan, and Zoom (subcategory)
• MRU_SCHEMA
Points to the last-saved user color scheme. The project reopens to this scheme.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Save (option)
• MRU_SETTINGS
The design entry tool stores the last-viewed Setup > Settings dialog box pane, as follows:
<key name=”MRU_SETTINGS” value=”<pane_name>”/>
The next time you open the Setup > Settings dialog box, this pane is selected.
Default: Designs
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• MRU_SIZE
Sets the maximum number of Most Recently Used items displayed in the list.
Default: 6
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• NAMESON
Obsolete.
• NAV_BLOCK_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Controls filtering for blocks and schematics in the Navigator, as follows:
0 — Display all blocks or schematics (Wildcard).
1 — Use regular expressions in filters to constrain the displayed list. Default.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
1 — Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Right-click schematic node, and then choose Sort > Ascending
or Descending (menu item)
• NAV_BLOCK_SORT_ORDER_BY
Controls the way the Navigator window sorts blocks or schematics, as follows:
0 — Name. Default.
1 — View.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Right-click a schematic node, and then choose Sort > Name or
View (popup menu item)
• NAV_BOARD_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_BOARD_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_BOARD_LABEL_FORMAT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_BOARD_SORT_ORDER_BY
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_BUS_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Sets the format of the info-tip for bus objects in the Navigator window.
Values: $(Name), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: Bus: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and
Buses (subcategory), Bus info Tip format (option)
• NAV_BUS_LABLE_FORMAT
Sets the bus label format in the Navigator window using any combination of the following
variables:
$(Name). Default.
$(Path)
$(Type)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon,
colon, and so on.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• NAV_NET_DISPLAY
Controls Navigator window display of nets and buses, as follows:
0 — Does not display nets and buses.
1— Does display nets and buses. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and
Buses (subcategory), Display nets and buses (option)
• NAV_NET_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Controls filtering for nets in the Navigator window, as follows:
0 — Display all symbols (Wildcard). Default.
1 — Use regular expressions in filters to constrain the displayed list.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: In the Navigator window, right-click a net, and then choose the
Filter (menu item)
• NAV_NET_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Configures the nets info-tip format in the Navigator window using predefined variables and
formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon, and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: Net: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and
Buses (subcategory), Net info tip format (option)
• NAV_NET_LABEL_FORMAT
Configures the nets label format in the Navigator window using predefined variables and
formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon, and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Nets and
Buses (subcategory), Net label format (option)
• NAV_NET_SORT_DESCENDING
Sets the nets and buses sorting order in the Navigator window, as follows:
0 — Ascending. Default.
1 — Descending.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Warn before replacing selected sheets during copy (option)
• NAV_SPLICE_SORT_ORDER_BY
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_FILTER_USE_REGEXP
Obsolete.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_INFOTIP_FORMAT
Obsolete.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_LABEL_FORMAT
Obsolete.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_SORT_DESCENDING
Obsolete.
• NAV_SUBSYSTEM_SORT_ORDER_BY
Obsolete.
• NAV_WIRE_DISPLAY
Internal use. Do not modify.
• NET_FOURWAY_MODE
Specifies how the net connection displays on the schematic.
0 — Display the default net connection dot.
1 — Display the alternative four way net connection as shown:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• NET_LENGTH_HR
Specifies the length of the stub automatically placed on symbol pins at instantiation if you
select the Add Components with Nets Stubs option in Databook. Default: 1.016e+006.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Nets (subcategory), Net Length (option)
• NET_SPACING
Obsolete.
• NET_SPACING_HR
Obsolete.
• NET_TOOLTIPS
Controls the visibility of net tooltips (labels and properties) on schematics, as follows:
0 — Hide net tooltips. Default.
1 — Display net tooltips.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Show tooltips
(section), Nets (option)
• NEW_ATTR_VIS
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NEW_PROJECT_CL
Stores the path to the last central library location entered in the File > New > Path dialog
box.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
• NEW_PROJECT_DEFAULT_CL
Sets a path to a default central library location that populates the New Project dialog box.
The dialog box uses this value if the NEW_PROJECT_CL setting is empty.
Default:/<install_dir>/<release>/standard/examples/SampleLib2007/SampleLib.lmc
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: File > New > Project (menu item), Central Library Path (option)
• NEW_PROJECT_DEFAULT_LOCATION
Sets a default location for new projects. The design entry tool uses this path when the
NEW_PROJECT_LOCATION setting is empty. If empty, the design entry tool uses
${WDIR}/DxProjects.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• NEW_PROJECT_LOCATION
Stores the path to the newest project (File > New > Project) location.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: File > New > Project (menu item), Location (option)
• NEW_PROJECT_NAME
Sets a default name for new projects. The design entry tool adds a number suffix when
needed. Default: Project
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• NON_UNDOABLE_MOVE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• NO_UNDO_CBA_MOVE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• OATCHECK
Obsolete.
• OATS
Obsolete.
• OATSTOOLS_FILE_BYPASS
Obsolete.
• OPEN_VIEWS_ON_BULK_BLOCK_OPERATIONS
Sets the open sheets affected by a multi-sheet operation setting as one of the following:
0 — Do not open affected sheets. Default.
1 — Open affected sheets.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Open
affected sheets on multi-sheet operations (option)
The following are examples of multi-sheet annotation operations:
o Annotating component properties of symbols across multiple sheets with the
Databook tool.
For more information see “Annotating Component Properties on a Part or Symbol”
in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
o Updating property values with the Update Other Objects dialog box
(Tools > Update Other Objects menu item ).
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• ORIENTATION
Sets the sheet orientation as one of the following:
0 — Landscape. Default.
1 — Portrait.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Sheet Orientation (section), Portrait or Landscape (option)
• PADS_ZOOM
Sets the Pan and Zoom behavior to the PADS® layout tool configuration:
0 — Turns off the PADS style pan and zoom. Default.
1 — Turns on the PADS style pan and zoom.
Note
This setting is used in conjunction with DEFAULT_ZOOM and
EXPEDITION_ZOOM. Only one of these should be set to 1 (on) at a time.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Show
tooltips (section), Pins (option)
• PINTYPE_ARROWS
The tool uses this option in conjunction with the EURO_ARROWS option to set the
appearance of pintype arrows between full arrow and half arrow (European) style, as
follows:
None.........(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “0”, EURO_ARROWS, not applicable)
Full Size....(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “1”, EURO_ARROWS, value = “0”)
Half Size...(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = “1”, EURO_ARROWS, value = “1”)
Notes:
o The design entry tool displays only pintype arrows for symbols that have block types
of Module and Composite. The design entry tool does not display pintype arrows for
a block type of Pin.
o If a pintype does not exist on the symbol pin, the design entry tool does not display
Pintype Arrows.
Different pin types are represented by different arrows. Topic “Settings Dialog Box -
Advanced” on page 403 shows a list of these.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Pintype
Arrows (option)
• PLACEHOLDER
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• PNUMSON
Sets Pin number visibility on schematics as one of the following:
0 — The design entry tool hides Pin numbers. Default.
1 — The design entry tool displays Pin numbers.
Note
The tool uses this setting in conjunction with the ATTRIBUTE object’s VISIBLE
setting. See “DxDesigner.xml File Format - OBJECTS Section” on page 57.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• PRINTORIENTATION
Internal use only. Do not modify. This entry stores the last-used Portrait or Landscape
setting, as follows:
1 — Portrait. Default.
2 — Landscape.
To access from the GUI: File > Print (menu item), Properties (button), Printing
Shortcuts (tab), Orientation (dropdown list)
• PRINTPAPERSIZE
Internal use only. Do not modify. This entry stores the last-used paper size.
• PRINTSCALE
Obsolete.
• PRINTSCALEFACTOR
Sets a scale factor for the print output. Use a factor of 1 to scale the print output to 100% of
normal. A factor of .9 scales the output to 90%. Default: 1.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: File > Print (menu item), Scale factor (option and dropdown list)
• PRINTSCALETYPE
Obsolete.
• PRINTXMARGIN
Obsolete.
• PRINTYMARGIN
Obsolete.
• PROJECT_PLOT_ON_PC
Obsolete.
• PROPAGATE_PORTS_TO_SCH
Controls how the design entry tool handles missing ports to a lower-level schematic, as
follows:
0 — You must manually add missing ports to a lower-level schematic from a block
using the Add > Missing Ports menu item.
1 — Adding a pin to a block automatically causes the tool to add a corresponding port to
the lower-level schematic when you execute (right-click) Push Schematic from the
block. In addition, when you place parts containing multiple part database slots
(multiple parts in one package), the placed part automatically assigns a slot number
and corresponding pin values.
For more information, see “Connecting Hierarchical Levels Using a Top-Down Approach”
in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Results: The design entry tool applies both the local scale factor and the Symbol
Editor scale factor to the updated symbol. The design entry tool rescales the symbol
to 0.64.
For example, when set to 1 using the same scenario as the previous example:
a. Set the scale factor on a symbol to 0.8 in the design entry tool.
b. Change the scale factor in the Symbol Editor for that symbol to 0.8.
c. Update the symbol in the design entry tool.
Results: The design entry tool resets the local scale factor to 1 on all symbols
requiring an update. For this example, the updated symbol in the design entry tool
reflects only the 0.8 scale factor set in the Symbol Editor.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Reset
Component Scale on Symbol Update (option)
For more information, see “Updating a Project With Changed Library Content” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
• RNUMSON
Sets reference designator visibility on schematics as one of the following:
0 — The design entry tool hides reference designators.
1 — The design entry tool displays reference designators. Default.
Note
The tool uses this setting in conjunction with the ATTRIBUTE object’s VISIBLE
setting. See “DxDesigner.xml File Format - OBJECTS Section” on page 57.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
To access from the GUI: Window > Schematic Tabs (menu item)
• SCOPE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SD_CONNECTOR_PIN_SPACING
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SDISTANCE
Obsolete. See SDISTANCE_HR.
• SDISTANCE_HR
Specify a positive integer to set the number of pixels that determine the selection distance
boundary during object selection on a schematic.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 254000 sets the increment to 2.54 mm, or 0.1 in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Selection
Distance [<Units>] (option)
• SELBORDERS
Controls whether borders are selected, as follows:
0 — During an area selection, the design entry tool does not select borders.
1 — During an area selection, the design entry tool includes borders in the selection.
Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: View > Other Windows > Selection Filter (menu item),
Borders (option)
• SELNAMEON
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SELRIPPERS
Controls whether rippers are selected, as follows:
0 — During an area selection, the design entry tool does not select rippers.
1 — During an area selection, the design entry tool includes rippers in the selection.
Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: View > Other Windows > Selection Filter (menu item),
Rippers (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• SEPARATE_FLIP_MIRROR
Controls the Flip or Mirror operation when more than one object is selected, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group of objects against the
symmetry axis of the entire selected group. Default.
1 — The design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group of objects against each
object’s symmetry axis.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Flip/Mirror
objects separately (option)
• SHEETSIZE
Sets the default sheet size for all new schematics and symbols. Specify one of the following
sizes:
Note
The following values correspond to the SIZES definitions in “DxDesigner.xml File
Format - SIZES Section” on page 125:)
0 — A ()
1 — B. Default.
2 — C ()
3 — D ()
4 — E ()
5 — A4 ()
6 — A3 ()
7 — A2 ()
8 — A1 ()
9 — A0 ()
10 — Custom — User-definable width and height using the HEIGHT and WIDTH
values you specify.
11 — F ()
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size (option)
• SHEETZONINGGRID
Sets the visibility of schematic zoning grid shown in Figure 2-56 on page 331 as one of the
following:
0 — Hide the schematic zoning grid. Default.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• STAGGER_DISTANCE_HR
Sets the distance the design entry tool uses when staggering nets. If the value is too small,
overlapping nets could result as shown in the following figure:
Enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default value of 9.08mm or 0.3575in
appears in the file as 908000 (9.08mm * 100,000). Default: 200 (milliseconds)
• STROKE_DELAY
Specifies how much time the design entry tool allows for the user to complete a stroke.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
• STROKES
Turns on or off the ability for you to draw predefined patterns in the schematic window
using the mouse, which map to commands or functions, as follows:
0 — Turns off strokes.
1 — Turns on strokes. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Strokes, Pan, and Zoom (subcategory), Strokes off (option)
For more information, see the MIDSTROKE description in this topic — Controls which
mouse button draws the strokes.
Also see “Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes” on page 427.
• SG_PROPERTIES
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINS_IN
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINS_OUT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PIN_LABEL_SIZE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• SG_PIN_LENGTH
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PIN_SPACING
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_SYM_ATTR_SIZE
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_ANALOG
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_IN
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_BI
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_OCM
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_OEL
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_OUT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• SG_PINTYPE_TRI
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• TABSSHEET_NAMES_ONLY
Controls what information the design entry tool displays in the schematic tabs, as follows:
0 — The design entry tool displays the schematic name followed by the sheet name on
schematic tabs. Default.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
1 — The design entry tool displays only the schematic sheet name on schematic tabs.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• TEXT_THRESHOLD
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• TIPOFTHEDAY
Controls how the Tip of the Day displays, as follows:
0 — Do not display the tip of the day when you start the design entry tool.
1 — Display the tip of the day when you start the design entry tool. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Help > Tip of the Day (menu item)
• TIPOFTHEDAYFILEPOS
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• TIPOFTHEDAYTIMESTAMP
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• UNDO
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• UNDO_LEVEL
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• UNIQUE_LABEL
Controls the design entry tool labeling behavior when you copy nets, components, or pins,
as follows:
0 — Do not automatically create a unique label during a copy operation. Default.
1 — The design entry tool automatically creates a unique label during a copy operation.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Unique
names on copy (option)
• UNIT
Sets the design entry tool unit of measurement as one of the following:
mm — millimeters
cm — centimeters
in — inches. Default.
Once set, the design entry tool uses the unit of measurement you specified for measurements
such as SHEETSIZE (Default Sheet Size) and GRID_HR (Grid Spacing).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
Unit (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• UNLIMITED_TEXT
Internal use only. Do not modify.
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_PAGENUMBERS
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_ANNOTATIONS
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_BUS_RIPPERS
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_BUS_SIGNALS
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_PROPERTIES
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_RANGE
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_OBJECTS_SD_RANGE
Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools > Update Other Objects (menu
item).
• UPDATE_PRINT_ORDER
Specifies whether or not to update the print order to synchronize schematic sheet page
numbers with the print order shown in the Navigator window:
0 — Do not automatically update the print order.
1 — Automatically updates the print order.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Advanced (category), Update
Print Order before updating Cross Reference (option)
• USEEXCLUDEINFO
Controls which sheets (if any) to exclude from printing or PDF generation, as follows:
0 — Do not exclude designated sheets from printout.
1 — Exclude designated sheets from printout. Default.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• XPROB_HLU_LIMITOPEN
Controls cross probing to highlight unplaced components only on open schematics or ICTs,
as follows:
0 — Do not limit the highlight of unplaced components during cross probing to only
open schematics or ICTs.
1 — Limit the highlight of unplaced components during cross probing to only open
schematics or ICTs. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category),
Highlight unplaced components (section), Limit to already open documents (option)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN
Use this setting to limit cross probing between the design entry tool and other applications,
such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Allow cross probing with other applications to any applicable the design entry tool
schematic or ICT.
1 — Limits cross probing with other applications to just open the design entry tool
schematics or ICTs. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN_COMP
(This setting is only applicable when XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing between the design entry tool and
other applications, such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Do not allow cross probing components on already open documents. Default.
1 — Enables cross probing with components on already open documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option checked), for Components (option)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN_NET
(This setting is not applicable unless XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing between the design entry tool and
other applications, such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Do not allow cross probing with signal nets on already open documents. Default.
1 — Enables cross probing with signal nets on already open documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option checked), for Signal Nets (options)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN_GLOBALNET
(This setting is not applicable unless XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing between the design entry tool and
other applications, such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Do not allow cross probing with global nets on already open documents. Default.
1 — Enables cross probing with global nets on already open documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option checked), for Global Nets (option)
• XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN_PIN
(This setting is not applicable unless XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing between the design entry tool and
other applications, such as PADS Layout, as follows:
0 — Do not allow cross probing with global nets on already open documents. Default.
1 — Enables cross probing with global nets on already open documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Limit
selection to already open documents (option checked), for Pins (option)
• XPROB_SEL_ZOOMFIT
Controls whether the design entry tool zooms in on the selected, cross-probed object. This
setting also works with dynamic links to zoom in on the target object when the tool traverses
a link.
0 — Do not zoom in to selected objects during cross probing. Default.
1 — Zoom in to selected objects during cross probing.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Cross Probing (category), Zoom
Fit to Selected objects (option)
• XREF_ANNOTATION_ON
Sets Pin number visibility on schematics as one of the following:
0 — Do not display cross reference annotations in the entire design. Default.
1 — Display cross reference annotations in the entire design.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Display (category), Xref
Annotation (option)
• XTRAERRS
Control the design capture tool Check utility, as follows:
0 — Do not provide additional Check utility testing.
1 — Provide additional Check utility testing and error reporting operations. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Arguments
• A_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 0 as the following:
21590000 — HEIGHT (215.90mm or 8.5in)
27940000 — WIDTH (297.4mm or 11.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A (option)
• B_SIZE_HR
Predefines the B sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 1 as the following:
27940000 — HEIGHT (279.4mm or 11.0in)
43180000 — WIDTH (431.8mm or 17.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = B (option)
• C_SIZE_HR
Predefines the C sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 2 as the following:
43180000 — HEIGHT (431.8mm or 17.0in)
55880000 — WIDTH (558.8mm or 22.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = C (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• D_SIZE_HR
Predefines the D sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE = 3 as the following:
55880000 — HEIGHT (558.8mm or 22.0in)
86360000 — WIDTH (863.6mm or 34.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = D (option)
• E_SIZE_HR
Predefines the E sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 4 as the following:
86360000 — HEIGHT (863.6mm or 34.0in)
111760000 — WIDTH (1,117.6mm or 44.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = E (option)
• A4_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A4 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 5 as the following:
20999999.91 — HEIGHT (210.0mm or 8.268in)
29699999.02 — WIDTH (297.0mm or 11.693in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A4 (option)
• A3_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A3 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 6 as the following:
29699999.02 — HEIGHT (297.0mm or 11.693in)
41999999.82 — WIDTH (420.0mm or 16.535in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A3 (option)
• A2_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A2 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 7 as the following:
41999999.82 — HEIGHT (420.0mm or 16.535in)
59400000.58 — WIDTH (594.0mm or 23.386in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A2 (option)
• A1_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A1 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 8 as the following:
59400000.58 — HEIGHT (594.0mm or 23.386in)
84099999.44 DxDesigner.xml Miscellaneous DxDesigner Settings Section — WIDTH
(841.0mm or 33.110in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A1 (option)
• A0_SIZE_HR
Predefines the A0 sheet default size used by SHEETSIZE= 9 as the following:
84099999.44 — HEIGHT (841.0mm or 33.110in)
118900000.96 — WIDTH (1189.0mm or 46.811in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
To access from the GUI: Setup > Settings (menu item), Schematic Editor (category),
New Sheets (subcategory), Size = A0 (option)
• Z_SIZE_HR
Sets a custom sheet size for new schematics. If SHEETSIZE="10", then the design entry
tool uses the following the HEIGHT and WIDTH settings you define in the SIZES section:
<size name="Z_SIZE_HR">
<key name="HEIGHT" value="your_value"/>
<key name="WIDTH" value="your_value"/>
</size>
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Arguments
• DXDB_AUTO_QUERY_LIBRARIES
Specifies whether the Databook tool performs a query on the selected library during
searches.
0 — The Databook tool does not perform a query. You must first select the library, then
click the search (!) icon in the Search window to get search results.
1 —The tool queries the library. Default.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Startup (tab), Automatically
query libraries when selected (option)
• DXDB_AUTO_SIZE_RESULTS_COLUMNS
Specifies whether the design entry tool adjusts the width of the Databook window data
columns based on content.
0 — Optimizes the size of the data cells. Default.
1 — Automatically adjusts the width of each column in the Results pane and shows
complete cell data.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Auto-size
query results columns (option)
• DXDB_COLLAPSE_SYMBOLS
Specifies whether the design entry tool displays records with different symbols as a single
row during searches.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
0 — The Search pane displays records with identical fields but different symbols in
different rows. Default.
1 — The Search pane displays records with identical fields but different symbols, in the
same row.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Display (section),
Display records with different symbols as a single row (option)
• DXDB_CONNECT_TABLES_WHEN_LOADING
Specifies whether the Databook tool connects to all databases in the .dbc file at startup.
0 — The tool does not connect to any databases at startup.
1 — The tool establishes a connection to all databases referenced in the .dbc
configuration file at startup. Default.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Startup (tab), Database
Connections (section), Connect to databases at startup (option)
• DXDB_DETECT_BAD_CRITERIA
Specifies whether the Databook tool automatically detects bad search criteria during
searches.
0 — The tool does not detect bad search criteria.
1 — The tool detects bad search criteria. The tool automatically runs additional searches
when the initial search does not produce results. Default.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Performance
(section), Automatically detect bad search criteria (option)
• DXDB_DISPLAY_NUMERICS_WITH_MAGNITUDE
Specifies how to display numeric values in the Databook window Magnitude column.
0 — Displays the actual numeric value from the database (for example, 10e-9).
1 — Converts numeric values and displays them using a magnitude suffix (for example,
displays a capacitance value of 10 nF). Default.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Performance
(section), Display Numeric values with magnitude (option)
• DXDB_ENABLE_COLUMN_TOOTIPS
Specifies how to display content in Databook window columns too narrow to display entire
string value.
0 — Default.
1 — Shows cell contents for columns too narrow to display the entire string value.
Applies to both the CL View and Search windows.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note
Exiting the design entry tool disables this option, and the CL View and Search
window columns open to their default sizes when you next invoke the Databook
tool.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Enable
Databook Window Column Tooltip (option)
• DXDB_ENABLE_DMS_CONNECTOR
Default: 1001.
• DXDB_IGNORE_COMPOSITES
Specifies whether to verify composites (block symbols) during live or hierarchical
verification.
0 — All components, including composites, are verified. Default.
1 — Composite symbols are not verified.
Note
Symbols in the associated subcircuit are subject to verification regardless of this
setting.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Verification
(section), Ignore Composites (option)
• DXDB_POSITION_ALL_LIBRARIES_FIRST
Specifies the position of <All> in the library combo box.
0 — Shows <All> as the last item in the library combo box. Default.
1 —Shows <All> as the first item in the library combo box.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Show
‘<All>’ as the first item in the Library combo box (option)
• DXDB_QUERY_RESULTS_LIMIT
Specifies the maximum number of query results to return. Default: 400.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Performance
(section), Query results limit (option)
• DXDB_QUERY_TIMEOUT
Specifies, in seconds, how long to wait before timing out. This time limit helps improve
performance on large data sets. Default: 60.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Performance
(section), Query timeout (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
• DXDB_SEARCH_DISPLAY_PROPERTY_NAMES
Specifies whether to display PADS Designer property names or database field names from
the database table column headings for each library listed in the Search window.
0 — Displays PADS Designer property names. Default.
1 — Displays field names.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Appearance (tab), Display
(section), Database Field Names or Xpedition Designer Property Names (options)
• DXDB_STRIP_FROM_CONNECT_STRING
Specifies whether a database password is required at startup. Default: PWD.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), right-click in the Databook
window, and choose Properties (popup menu item), Strip from connect string when saving
(option)
• DXDB_UPDATE_TABLES_WHEN_LOADING
Specifies whether the Databook tool connects to all databases in the .dbc file at startup.
0 — The tool does not connect to all databases at startup. Default.
1 — The tool connects to all databases in the .dbc file at startup and checks the databases
for new or removed table fields. The tool modifies the .dbc file to reflect any changes.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Startup (tab), Database
Connections (section), Connect to databases and update tables at startup (option)
• DXDB_USE_CACHE
Specifies whether to use the Databook cache during verification.
0 — The cache is not used. Default.
1 — The Databook tool stores results of the initial search in memory which improves the
speed of subsequent searches.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Search (tab), Verification
(section), Use Databook cache (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_TEXT
Specifies the color of the grid text. Default: 0x000000.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Text (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_LINK_TEXT
Specifies the color for hyperlinked entries. Default: 0x640064.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Link Text (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_HIGHLIGHT
Sets the highlight color of found text. Default: 0x0000ff.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Highlighted Text (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_EVEN_BCKGND
Specifies the color of the even rows of the grid. Default: 0xf5f5e1.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Background (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_ODD_BCKGND
Specifies the color of the odd rows of the grid. Default: 0xfffff5.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Verify (section),
Background (option), dropdown list to the right of the Background option
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_CRITERIA_TEXT
0x000000 — Default.
• DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_CRITERIA_BCKGND
0xe9e9e9 — Default.
• DXDB_COLOR_VERIFY_TEXT
Specifies the color for text in the Verify grid. Default: 0x000000.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Search (section),
Text (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_VERIFY_EVEN_BCKGND
Specifies the background color in the even grids of the Verify grid. Default: 0xebebe1.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Verify (section),
Background (option)
• DXDB_COLOR_VERIFY_ODD_BCKGND
Sets the background color in the odd grids of the Verify grid. Default: 0xf5f5eb.
To access from the GUI: View > Databook (menu item), Colors (tab), Verify (section),
Background (option), dropdown list to the right of the Background option
• DXDB_DO_NOT_STORE_USER_CREDENTIALS
Default: 0.
• DXDB_DROPBOX_LOCATION
Default: Null.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<PartListerConfiguration version="3">
<!-- Miscellaneous Part Lister settings, see the following tables for
more information -->
<Entry name="name" value="CORPORATE"/>
<Entry name="outputFormat" value="PLAIN"/>
<Entry name="outputFileExt" value="txt"/>
<Entry name="pagination" value="YES"/>
<Entry name="pagelength" value="150"/>
<Entry name="delimiter" value=" "/>
<Entry name="delimiterbefore" value="NO"/>
<Entry name="delimiterafter" value="NO"/>
<Entry name="addTitleRow" value="YES"/>
<Entry name="ignoreColumnWidths" value="NO"/>
<Entry name="open" value="YES"/>
<Header>
<!-- See the following tables for more information -->
</Header>
<Columns>
<!-- See the following tables for more information -->
</Columns>
The lines that define miscellaneous configuration settings in the Partlister.ipl file have the
following format:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Note
You should only change the setting value.
If the readonly=”1” option has been applied to an entry name in the Partlister.ipl file, such as:
<Entry name="outputFormat" value="PLAIN" readonly=”1”/>, the associated setting cannot
be changed in the Tools > Part Lister dialog box.
Parameters
• The following tables list the setting names and describe the editable parameter values in
each section of the <name>.ipl file:
o Part Lister Initialization File Miscellaneous Settings Section
o Part Lister Initialization File Header Section
o Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Table 1-7. Part Lister Initialization File Miscellaneous Settings Section (cont.)
Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
delimiter Specifies a delimiter character (such as pipe | ) between columns.
Example:
<Entry name="delimiter" value=" |"/>
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced(tab), Delimiter (section), > (option)
delimiterbefore Controls the column delimiter placement in front of the first column as
one of the following:
• NO — Do not add the column delimiter in front of the first column.
Default.
• YES — Add the column delimiter in front of the first column.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Delimiter (section), Before
first column (option)
delimiterafter Controls the column delimiter placement after the last column as one
of the following:
• NO — Do not add the column delimiter after the last column.
Default.
• YES — Add the column delimiter in front of the first column.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Delimiter (section), After last
column (option)
addTitleRow Controls the Titles row that appears at the top of each column in the
Part Lister output as follows:
• NO — Do not add the Titles row at the top of each column.
• YES — Add the Titles row at the top of each column. Default.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Output (section), Add Title
Rows (option)
ignoreColumnWidths Controls the Part Lister use of column width settings in Text Output as
follows:
• NO — Do not use the column width settings.
• YES — Use the column width settings. Default.
To access from the GUI:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Text Output (section), Ignore
Column Formatting (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format
SECTION DesignInfo
<!-- Also see table Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section --!>
. . .
ENDSECTION
SECTION iCDB
<!-- Also see Project File Settings - iCDB Section--!>
. . .
ENDSECTION
SECTION FlowSettings
KEY FlowType "<value>" <!-- value= DX | NETLIST | SystemDesign --!>
ENDSECTION
SECTION Template_Design
. . .
ENDSECTION
SECTION ICXProInfo
KEY ICXProDir “ICXPro”
ENDSECTION
SECTION <board_name> <!-- Also see table Project File Settings -
<board_name> Section --!>
. . .
ENDSECTION
Parameters
Table 1-10. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section
Setting Name Setting Description
Independent Libraries (Netlist project only)
LIST IndependentLibraries
VALUE "DIR [W] . (my_netlist_proj)"
ENDLIST
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Symbol Libraries
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format
If the designer who has read-write access closes the sheet, the
other designers with the same sheet opened see the following text
on the information bar:
• If set to “0”, the first designer to open a sheet does not get read-
write access to the sheet. Instead, the information bar displays the
following:
Any other designer who opens the same sheet sees the same bar.
The first designer who clicks the Click to Edit button gets read-write
access to the sheet. All other designers then see a message in the
information bar that describes who has locked the sheet as follows:
If the Hide button is clicked, the information bar is hidden, but a thin
yellow bar is visible at the top of the schematic window. Click on the
bar to expand the information bar again. If the text in the information
bar changes while it is hidden, it flashes a few times to let you know
something changed.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Enable edit mode
for opened sheets (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format
SchematicDesignBackAnno If set to “1”, does not allow back annotation as shown in the
following example:
KEY SchematicDesignBackAnno “1”
If set to “0”, enables back annotation.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Boards
(subcategory), Board<#>, Allow back annotation (option)
SchematicDesignStatus If set to “1”, does not allow forward annotation as shown in the
following example:
KEY SchematicDesignStatus “1”
If set to “0”, enables forward annotation.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings (menu item), Project (category), Boards
(subcategory), Board<#>, Allow forward annotation (option)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format
Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Project Template File [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format
AddPopup 1
ChangeIct2Sch 1
Color 3
DisableMappedFonts 0
FONT_CUSTOM_FONTS Courier-Bold
FONT_FIXED Courier-Bold
FONT_GOTHIC Courier-Bold
FONT_KANJI HeiseiKakuGo-W5
FONT_OLDENGLISH Courier-Bold
FONT_PLOT Courier-Bold
FONT_ROMAN Times-Roman
FONT_ROMANBOLD Times-Bold
FONT_ROMANBOLDITALIC Times-BoldItalic
FONT_ROMANITALIC Times-Italic
FONT_SANSSERIF Helvetica
FONT_SANSSERIFBOLD Courier-Bold
FONT_SCRIPT Courier-Bold
FONT_SCRIPTBOLD Courier-Bold
HorizontalScale 100
LineThickness 1
MaxAnnos 100000
MaxObjs 100000
MaxPages 1024
SheetOrder
StartAcrobat 0
StrokeThickness 1
UrlProperties
UseDxDMapping 0
UseExclusion 1
VisibleHLs 1
See the descriptions in the following tables for more information on each parameter.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format
Parameters
Table 1-13. PDF Writer Initialization File Settings
Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
AddPopup Determines whether a popup menu appears in Adobe Acrobat as
follows:
• 0 — Does not create a popup menu.
• 1 — Creates a popup menu in the generated PDF file for each
component in the design. Default.
When you click a component in Adobe Acrobat, the shortcut menu
displays the symbol name, properties, and the option to push to the
underlying schematic if the component is a composite, as shown
below:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
PDF Writer Initialization File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Special Components File Format
When the design entry tool loads a project, if a special components file for that project is
specified in the <design_name>.prj file, such as the following:
SECTION
. . .
KEY PinComponents "./speccomp.ini"
. . .
END SECTION
the special components information contained in that file is loaded into the design entry tool.
Format
The file is composed of one section.
[PINCOMPONENTS]
This section defines the symbol for specified special components.
Syntax Example:
PinComponentType=symbol_name
In the syntax example, PinComponentType specifies the special component,
symbol_name is the name of the symbol.
Example:
PORT_IN=builtin:HIER_INPUT_RIGHT.1 (Defines the symbol for an input
hierarchical connector)
PORT_BI=builtin:HIER_BIDIRECTIONAL_LEFT.1 (Defines the symbol for a bi-
directional hierarchical connector)
. . .
• GROUND_PINS
• NET_RIPPER
• PORT_ANALOG
• PORT_BI
• PORT_IN
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables
• PORT_OCL
• PORT_OEM
• PORT_OUT
• PORT_TRI
• POWER_PINS
• RIPPER_BUS_BUS
• RIPPER_BUS_NET
• RWTERM
• SHEET_PINS
• SPLICE
There can be multiple rows with the same PinComponentType.
Parameters
• symbol_name
Specifies the symbol name of the symbol.
To access from the GUI:
Setup > Settings menu item, Project (category), Special Components (subcategory)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Support Files and Variables
Design Entry Tool Environment Variables
Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Soft Pathname Settings [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Chapter 2
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Dialog boxes and windows provide a user interface for interacting with the tool.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Block Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to add a block to a schematic, or extract selected objects to a schematic
hierarchically below the block.
Figure 2-1. Add Block Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-2. Add Block Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Block name Defines the name of the block.
Extract schematic If checked, creates a hierarchical block and moves selected objects to a
new schematic lower in the project hierarchy.
Related Topics
Creating a Bottom-Up Hierarchical Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating a Top-Down Hierarchical Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Replicating a Package Pattern [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Packaging by Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Pin Array Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to create and place two or more pins with different names properties into a
symbol. For high density symbols, this dialog box provides an efficient, one-step method to
define, name, and then place multiple pins into a symbol.
Objects
Table 2-3. Add Pin Array Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Range If selected, creates pin names in a defined range and sequence interval
(delta) value. Optionally, you can apply an alphanumerical prefix or
suffix to all pin names.
List If selected, creates pin names from comma-separated entries in the
Values field. Optionally, you can apply an alphanumerical prefix or
suffix to all pin names.
Value If the Range option is selected, defines the minimum and maximum
decimal range to apply to new symbol pin names.
Delta If the Range option is selected, defines the numeric sequence interval to
apply to the minimum and maximum pin range value.
Reverses the minimum and maximum range in the Value field or the
order of the comma-separated pin names in the Values field.
Values If the List option is selected, specifies a comma-separated list of pin
names to apply to the symbol.
If the List option is selected, this option causes pin names to display in
the Values field in a list format. Use this workspace to add, remove, or
reorder the list of comma-separated pin names that appear in the Values
field.
Prefix, Suffix Defines the alphanumeric prefix and suffix for each pin name in an
array.
Hint Displays a preview of pin names based on settings in the dialog box.
Note: This field refreshes when you change pin name values.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Pin Array Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Properties Dialog Box
• Select one or more schematic objects, right-click, and choose the Add Properties menu
item.
Use this dialog box to add or change a property across a range or list of objects.
Figure 2-2. Add Properties Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-4. Add Properties Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Object
Type Specifies the type of object to which the property is added:
• Net
• Component
• Pin
• Unattached
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Properties Dialog Box
Range Selected, activates the Prefix, Value, Delta, and Suffix fields, enabling you to
apply a range of names to the selected objects, with an optional prefix, a
numerical value, and an optional suffix.
List Selected, activates the Values field, enabling you to provide a comma-separated
list of values for the selected objects.
Prefix Active only for Range.
Specifies a string of one or more characters to prepend to each property value.
Value Active only for Range.
Specifies a starting value. The starting value can be a decimal number, a lexical
character(s), or a bus index. An identifier box appears preceding the value you
enter:
- For decimal numbers: (0, 1, 2, ...)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Properties Dialog Box
Related Topics
Creating Component Arrays [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Ripping Nets From a Bus [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Archiver Wizard
Archiver Wizard
Scope: PADS Designer
To access: From the design entry tool, choose the Tools > Archiver menu item ( ).
Use this wizard to export a copy of a project and any related files to a specified archive location.
Note
For more overview information on the PADS Archiver, such as why you would use this
tool, see “Project Archive” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Description
The export archive process generates two files: the DxArchiver.xml file, which contains archive
settings; and an XML manifest file (manifest.xml), which contains describes the contents of the
archive package.
Objects
Table 2-5. PADS Archiver Wizard Contents
Field Description
Action Page
Export If enabled, selects the export project action.
Options Page
PADS Designer project file Defines the project to archive.
Target directory Defines the location of the archive copy.
Create pdf If checked, creates a single .pdf file that contains a line drawing
of each schematic sheet in the project.
Don’t compress If enabled, does not compress the output. The tool creates a copy
of the project and related files in the target directory.
Compress using Zip format If enabled, compresses the output into a single Zip format file.
The tool creates the archive in the target directory with a file
name of <project_name><timestamp>.zip.
Additional files Page
Add files to be archived Enables you to optionally add files to or delete files from the
archive. You can use the icons to manipulate the files.
Note: Archiver excludes the Address.adr file from ../
database/cdbsvr/ directory. Do not add this file to the
archive or your archive project will not open.
Results Page
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Archiver Wizard
Related Topics
Project Archive [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DxArchiver.xml File Format
DxArchiver
EDX Navigator [Enterprise Data eXchange (EDX) User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Array Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-6. Array Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Rectangular array Selected, defines a rectangular array of the selected object(s), such as the
AND gate shown below, by specifying the:
• Number of Rows (2 in the example).
• Number of Columns (3 in the
example) .
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Array Dialog Box
example).
Related Topics
Creating a Graphical Component Array [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Cadence Allegro Netlister Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-7. Cadence Allegro Netlister Contents
Field Description
Output File Specifies the name of the Cadence Allegro netlist file.
Name
Scope Defines the scope for the netlist file:
• Project
• Board (selected from the dropdown list)
• Block (selected from the dropdown list)
Options If checked, “Open the generated file” enables you to select:
• Open with - Specifies the program to use to open the file.
• Run new viewer for each generated file.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-8. CCZ Exporter Contents
Field Description
Output Folder Specifies the path to the output .cc (uncompressed) or .cce
(compressed and encrypted) file.
Enter a pathname or browse to its location.
Scope Enables you to select the scope to include in the output file:
Project - Selected, enables the “Run new window for each generated
file” option, allowing you to create new files, rather than
overwriting an existing file.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Change Border Symbol Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Change Border Symbol Dialog Box
Objects
Field Description
Apply changes to
Size Specifies the sheet size and orientation of the sheet(s) that you
want to change.
Range Specifies the range of sheets to change as one of the
following:
• Project
• Board
• Schematic
• Sheet. Default.
Size and orientation
Change sheet size and If checked, change the sheet size and orientation to the size
orientation to: and orientation specified by the Size field.
If “Include existing sheet of new size” is checked then change
the border of existing sheets to the new size.
Related Topics
Controlling Sheet Borders [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Column Chooser Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Column Chooser Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-9. Add Nets With Ports Contents
Field Description
(Data sources filter) The data source filter field at the top of the Data Sources section
of the dialog box, shown in Figure 2-7, filters the data sources list
based on the characters you enter.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Column Chooser Dialog Box
Related Topics
Configuring Data Sources to Search and Properties to Display [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Component Definition Update Dialog Box - Component Definitions Tab
Related Topics
Updating a Project With Changed Library Content [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Component Definition Update Dialog Box - Symbol Partitions Tab
Related Topics
Updating a Project With Changed Library Content [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Constraints Window
Constraints Window
Scope: Netlist project
To access: View > Other Windows > Constraints
Use this window to view and edit constraints associated with the selected object in a netlist
project design. The constraints definition file (<pcb_system_name>.cns), specifies constraints
and default constraint values for each layout tool, in \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\
standard\isis. The Constraints window content changes based on the selected object.
Note
You cannot add, delete, or modify the constraints definition file outside of the Constraints
window.
Tip
You can change the layout tool and the related constraints definition file for the project by
choosing the Setup > Settings menu item, Project category, and then choosing a layout tool
from the Layout Tool dropdown list.
Objects
Table 2-12. Constraints Window Contents
Field Description
Object Specifies the type of object displayed in the Constraint list:
• Components
• Nets
Constraint list A list of constraints and constraint values for the selected
objects. The tool displays a constraint value column for
each object of the type specified in the Object field. Each
value column heading is named with the Id property value
of the object. You can add or edit (override) a constraint
value by double-clicking a cell in a value column, and then
typing the value.
Tip: To see information about each constraint, hover
over a constraint name in the Constraint column. A
usage tip appears in hover text for each constraint.
To see if a constraint value is the default value from the
constraints file or it has been overridden (changed), hover
over a constraint value. For an overwritten constraint value,
the hover text is “Component Value = <n>?” or “Net Value
= <n>?”. For a default constraint value, the hover text is
“Default Value”.
PCB Interface button ( ) Opens the PCB Interface dialog box.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Constraints Window
Related Topics
Basic Design Workflow [PCB Interface User's Guide]
Creating and Editing Constraints [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Constraints Window
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-13. Customize Tools Menu Contents
Field Description
Menu Item Types
Common If checked, commands are available to all users of this machine in all projects.
Common tools are appended with “(common)” in the menu.
The PADS Designer tool stores common menu commands in a file named
commontools.ini in the \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard
directory.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box
Related Topics
Customizing the Tools Menu [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab
Objects
Table 2-14. Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab Contents
Field Description
Toolbars Displays the names of all system and user-defined toolbars. Select the
checkbox to display the toolbar.
Reset Returns the selected toolbar to its default state.
Reset All Returns all system toolbars to their default states.
New Opens the Toolbar Name dialog box, which enables you to enter a name
for the new toolbar. The toolbar appears in the center of the design
workspace.
Rename Opens the Toolbar Name dialog box, which enables you to enter a new
name for the selected user-defined toolbar.
Delete Deletes the selected custom toolbar.
Show text labels If checked, displays the button text with each button.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab
Objects
Table 2-15. Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab Contents
Field Description
Categories Lists categories of commands.
• New Menu — Displays a custom menu, which enables you to add a
menu to the menu bar.
• All Commands — Displays all application commands, which enables
you to add commands to menus and toolbars.
• Specific categories — Displays commands for each standard toolbar,
which enables you to add the commands to menus and other toolbars.
Commands Lists the commands for the selected category.
Description Displays the tooltip for the selected command.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab
Objects
Table 2-16. Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents
Field Description
Show Screen Tips on If checked, displays the command tooltip when you hover over a
toolbars toolbar icon.
Show shortcut keys in If checked, displays the command shortcut when you hover over
Screen Tips a toolbar icon.
Large Icons If checked, displays the toolbar icons as large images.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Objects
Table 2-17. Databook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab
Option Description
Add Library Opens the Add Library dialog box from which you can add a library
to the Component Library list. Also see “Adding, Editing, or Deleting
a Library” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Add Table Opens the Add Table dialog box from which you can add a table to a
selected library in the Component Library list. Also see “Adding a
Table to a Library” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Remove Removes the selected library or table from the Component Library
list.
Properties Enables you to change the characteristics of the selected library using
the Add Library dialog box. Also see “Adding, Editing, or Deleting a
Library” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Update All Updates the table fields in the current configuration with the fields in
the database(s).
Set Order Opens the Reorder Libraries dialog box in which you can set the
order of the libraries in the Component Library list. You can move
selected libraries up and down, or arrange the entire list in
alphabetical order. Also see “Reordering Libraries” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Component Libraries Shows the list of libraries in the configuration.
Field Name Shows the table headers in the selected database library.
Field Type (icon) Shows the field type: Normal, Symbol, Document, or Unused. See
the table in the “Editing Library Properties” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide for graphic
representations of the icons, or see Field Type (text) below for
descriptions.
Property Name Shows the property name as it appears in the symbol library. Double-
click the entry to edit it.
Load If checked, loads the property during verification. See “Databook
Tool Properties to Load” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Annotate If checked, annotates a property to a placed component. Properties
appear in the Properties window for placed components. See
“Databook Tool Properties to Annotate” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Table 2-17. Databook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab (cont.)
Option Description
Name Visible If checked, shows the property name on the schematic with placed
components. See “Databook Property Names and Values Set to
Visible” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Value Visible If checked, shows the property value on the schematic with placed
components. See “Databook Property Names and Values Set to
Visible” in the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Verification Key Defines the field that must be satisfied during searches. All returned
results satisfy the conditions of this field, as well as satisfying any
combination of other conditions.
Check to select the field.
Field Type (text) These options relate to the preceding Field Type (icon) entry. See the
table in the “Editing Library Properties” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
• Normal: A field (column) in the database whose values represent
normal properties and have no special meaning to the
PADS Databook tool. The PADS Databook tool passes the value
of a field whose field type is Normal to the design entry tool as a
property value.
• Symbol: A special field (column) in the database whose value
identifies the symbol that the PADS Databook tool should show
on the schematic.
Only one field name can be a Symbol field type.
• Document: A field (column) in the database whose values refer to
an external document, such as a path to a datasheet or web page.
Setting the field type to Document provides a link in the
PADS Databook tool property value that you can click to view a
document or a web page.
The PADS Databook tool does not annotate a property whose
field type is Document to the schematic. If you want to annotate a
file pathname or URL to the schematic, then set the field type to
Normal instead of Document.
• Unused: A field (column) in the database whose values do not
appear in the PADS Databook tool and are not available for
loading for verification or annotating to placed components.
• Unique ID: A field (column) in the database that contains the
unique identifier, or primary key, for records in the library. Only
one field in the library can have the Unique ID field type.
Magnitude Specifies a magnitude to show numeric property values in the
PADS Databook tool for the specified magnitude. Only active for
numerical data. See “Editing Library Properties”, Step 4g in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Table 2-17. Databook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab (cont.)
Option Description
Valid Magnitude Specifies the valid magnitude for the selected property. The Valid
Magnitude column only contains choices if the Magnitude column is
set to “Automatic.”
For example, capacitor manufacturers do not use milli or nano
magnifiers when specifying capacitance. Therefore, you can exclude
milli and non magnifiers in the Valid Magnitude column.
Units Specifies an appropriate unit for the selected property to append to
the magnitude.
For example, you might want the Value property for a capacitor to
have always have an “F,” or the Value property for an inductor to
always have an “H.”
Show Unit for IEC62 Specifies whether or not you want to show units in IEC62 format for
your components. This format uses the unit in place of the decimal
point, so a 2.2k resistor would appear as 2k2.
Use symbol data from Specifies to use the symbol associated with the part number. Active
Central Library only if you do not have a Symbol field in your database library and
you do have a Part Number field.
See “Associating Symbols with Library Components” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Move Up Moves a selected row(s) in the table up one row.
Move Down Moves a selected row(s) in the table down one row.
Related Topics
Databook Window
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Databook Configuration File Changes [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Editing Library Properties [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
• Component Instantiation/Annotation
• Component Annotation
• Selected Component Annotation
• Component Loading
• Cross Probing
• Symbols — You can specify which symbols to exclude when loading components into
the PADS Databook tool from PADS Designer for verification.
• Advanced
Objects
Table 2-18. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Instantiation/
Annotation
Option Description
Maintain Maintains the visibility of existing properties, based on the current component
Property if annotating, or symbol if adding a new part.
Visibility
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Related Topics
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Configuring the Databook Script [PADS Schematic Design Automation Reference]
Databook Configuration File Changes [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-25. PADS Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box Options
Field Description
Library Name Specifies the Databool tool library name.
Symbol Expression Specifies the name of one or more symbols to apply to all
components in the library. The name can be a single symbol
name, a comma-delimited list of base symbol names, or a
wildcard expression.
If you specify a wildcard expression, the Databook tool
applies the symbol expression to all of the symbols in your
search path (for example, cap*, cap.1, res*, or res.1). You
should avoid wildcards when possible because they can return
unexpected matches.
You can assign more than one base symbol name to a
component by specifying the base symbol names in a
comma-delimited list. For example: “dl, dled, dled_bright”.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box
Table 2-25. PADS Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box Options
Field Description
Advanced button Displays the advanced options section of the Library Options
dialog box, which enables you to set the following:
• Tables Joined Vertically —Links tables vertically to
provide a single search interface for components stored in
multiple tables.
Linked tables must have the same structure and field data
types, and the tables must contain the same number of
columns with the same column names.
• Tables Joined Horizontally — Links tables horizontally
and provides access to component properties in multiple
tables.
Horizontally linked tables join disparate information about
the same set of components into a single virtual table.
Selecting Tables Joined Horizontally enables the Choose
Link Table button and Join Type options of the Library
Options dialog box.
• Join Type — Specifies the join type of tables joined
horizontally as either:
• Inner Join — Adds the combined records from two
tables to a query's results only if the values of the joined
fields meet specified criteria. The values of the joined
fields must be equal.
• Left Outer Join — Includes records even if there are no
related records in the joined tables.
• Enable case insensitive symbol search — Case insensitive
searches are performed on symbols in the database tables
(Default: unchecked).
• Enable case insensitive properties search — Case
insensitive searches are performed on properties in the
database tables (Default: unchecked).
Choose Link Table button Prerequisite: The “Tables Joined Horizontally” option is
selected.
Displays the Table Properties dialog box to specify the data
source and the link table name that defines the relationship
between tables.
Tip: It is usually only necessary to specify a link table if
you are using a non-relational database data source such as
a spreadsheet or text files.
Related Topics
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Library Properties Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-26. PADS Databook Tool Properties Dialog Box Options
Field (Tab) Description
Startup Defines the PADS Databook tool startup behavior:
• Enable database support (licensed) — If checked, enables you to select one
of the following Database Connections:
• Connect to databases at startup — Establishes a connection to all
databases referenced in the .dbc configuration file at startup (default
database connection setting).
• Connect to databases and update tables at startup — Connects to all
databases in the .dbc file at startup and checks the databases for new or
removed table fields (.dbc file is modified to reflect any changes).
• Connect to databases as needed — Reduces startup time by not
connecting to a database until the first time you execute a query against a
library. The PADS Databook tool then connects to the database
referenced by the library.
• Strip from connect string when saving — If checked, specifies that you must
enter the database password at startup.
— If unchecked, stores the database password in the DxDesigner.xml file,
so you do not have to enter the password at startup.
• Do not show CL View when configuration is loaded — If checked, hides the
CL View when the .dbc file is loaded. Default: unchecked. When you
invoke the PADS Databook tool and load a project file, only the Search
window appears.
Selecting this option simplifies opening a .dbc file for editing: In the
Databook tool Search window, right-click and choose the Configure > Edit
Configuration menu item.
Tip: Click the Show CL View button ( ) to open the CL View for the
current session.
Note: When the .dbc file is not loaded, the CL View always appears.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Table 2-26. PADS Databook Tool Properties Dialog Box Options (cont.)
Field (Tab) Description
Search Defines parameters for the PADS Databook tool searches:
Display
• Display records with different symbols as a single row:
— If checked, the Search pane displays records with identical fields, but
dfferent symbols, in the same row.
— If unchecked, the Search pane displays records with identical fields, but
different symbols, in different rows.
Performance
• Query results limit — Specifies the maximum number of query results to
return. Default: 400.
• Query time out — Specifies, in seconds, how long to wait before timing out
Default: 60 seconds.
• Automatically detect bad search criteria — If checked, detects bad search
criteria. Automatically runs additional searches when the initial search does
not produce results.
• Automatically query libraries when selected — If checked, performs a query
on the selected library. If unchecked, you must first select the library, then
click the search (!) icon in the Search window to get search results.
Verification
• Ignore composites
— If checked, specifies whether to eliminate composite symbols from
consideration during live or hierarchical verification. Symbols in the
associated sub circuit are still subject to verification regardless of the Ignore
composites setting.
— If unchecked, all components, including composites, are verified.
• Use Databook cache — Specifies whether to use the PADS Databook cache
during verification.
— If checked, the PADS Databook tool stores results of the initial search in
memory, which improves the speed of subsequent searches.
— If unchecked, the cache is not used.
Note: Depending on your database size, use of the Databook tool cache
can result in consumption of large amounts of memory
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Table 2-26. PADS Databook Tool Properties Dialog Box Options (cont.)
Field (Tab) Description
Appearance Display numeric values with magnitude (see “Editing Library Properties” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide )
• If checked, converts numeric values and displays them using a magnitude
suffix (for example, displays a capacitance value of 10 nF).
• If unchecked, displays the actual numeric value from the database (for
example, 10e-9).
Auto-size query results columns
• If checked, automatically adjusts the width of each column in the Results
pane and shows complete cell data.
• If unchecked, optimizes the size of the data cells.
Show <All> as the first item in the library combo box.
• If unchecked, shows <All> as the last item in the library combo box.
Enable Databook Window Column ToolTips
• If checked, shows cell contents for columns too narrow to display the entire
string value. Applies to both the CL View and Search windows.
Note: Exiting the design entry tool unchecks this option, and the CL
View and Search window columns open to their default sizes when you
next invoke the Databook tool.
Display
• Database Field Names — Displays the field names from the database table
column headings for each library listed in the Search window.
• Xpedition Designer Property Names — Displays the design entry tool
property names for each library listed in the Search window.
Tip: Select the design entry tool Property Names when linking multiple
tables and for viewing the property names instead of table names.
Colors • Search — Changes search text, highlighted text, link text, and background
colors.
• Verify — Changes verify text and background.
• Restore Defaults — Restores the colors to their original settings.
Each color property dropdown list includes the following option:
• Other — Selects a color different from those available in the menu color
palettes
Related Topics
Databook Window
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Searching for Components in Database Libraries [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window
Databook Window
Scope: PADS Designer
To access:
• View > PADS Databook
• Databook button ( )
Use this window to interface to ODBC databases, and a central library or distributed libraries.
From these various component locations, you can access and place parts on your schematic.
Description
The following shows the PADS Databook window with the Search pane selected:
Objects
Table 2-27. PADS Databook Window - Search Pane Contents
Option Description
New Search Window Opens a new search window pane in the PADS Databook window.
See “Searching for Components in Database Libraries” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window
Library dropdown list Contains a list of libraries defined in your configuration file.
See “Databook Tool Libraries” in the
PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide.
Query Builder button Enables you to build expressions to search the library for your
components.
See “Creating a Databook Search Query” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Criteria Button Shows a text box with the search criteria you defined in the Query
Builder.
See “Creating a Databook Search Query” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Execute the Query Refreshes the list of components based on the changes you have
made to the query builder or to the filter fields.
See “Searching for Components in Database Libraries” and
“Creating a Databook Search Query” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window
Add New Component Activates place mode in the schematic window, so you can place the
with All Properties component on the schematic. The component includes all properties
assigned to the component in the library.
See “Adding Unique Components to a Schematic With the
Databook Window” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Add New Component Activates place mode in the schematic window, so you can place the
with only Common component on the schematic. The component includes only the
Properties properties designated as generic properties in the library.
Use, for example, when you want to place a capacitor symbol but do
not yet know what value of capacitor you want.
See “Adding Generic Components to a Schematic with the Databook
Window” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Annotate Component Adds all properties (as assigned in the library) to the selected
with All Properties component on the schematic.
Use on generic components when you are ready to apply properties
of a unique component.
See “Annotating Component Properties on a Schematic With the
Databook Window” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Annotate Component Adds only the generic properties (as assigned in the library) to the
with Common Properties selected component on the schematic.
See “Annotating Component Properties on a Schematic With the
Databook Window” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window
Add Component With Specifies that when you add a component, a net stub attaches to each
Net Stubs pin.
Add Pin Labels To Nets Specifies that when you add a component with a net stub, the net
includes a label to match the label of the pin.
Only active when Add Component With Net Stubs is active.
Symbol Preview window Shows a graphical representation of the component’s symbol. You
can zoom and pan the graphic in this window with the right-click
popup menu. If you click in the window, you can zoom in with F8
and zoom out with F7. Also, you can place a part by clicking in the
window and dragging the symbol onto the schematic.
Symbol dropdown list Defines the symbol to place in the schematic from a list of symbols
associated with the component in the library. Also shows the layout
decal associated with the component.
Related Topics
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Searching for Components in Database Libraries [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Related Topics
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Working With Symbols and Components [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Part View Tab
Related Topics
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab
Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab
Placing One or More Instances of a Block [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab
Related Topics
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Window - CL View - Part View Tab
Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab
Placing Symbols in a Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Replacing Local Symbols With Central Library Symbols [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Placing One or More Instances of a Block [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab
Table 2-31. PADS Databook Tool - CL View Options — Reuse Blocks Tab
Option Description
Symbol dropdown list Displays a list of library symbols associated with the reuse
block, allowing you to place it in the schematic. Also displays
the layout decal associated with the part.
Related Topics
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Window - CL View - Part View Tab
Databook Window - CL View - Symbol View Tab
Placing One or More Instances of a Block [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - Query Builder
Related Topics
Creating a Databook Search Query [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - Symbols View Pane
Related Topics
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Placing Symbols in a Design With the Databook Window [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Window - Symbols View - Symbol View Tab
Related Topics
Placing Symbols in a Design With the Databook Window [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Use this window tab to control the visibility of commonly-used objects, such as tooltips, text,
highlighting, and the grid, on the schematic. You can also control the visibility of some
Navigator window items such as listings of nets. Easy access to these settings enables you to
keep your work area uncluttered by hiding unneeded data until you need to see it.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Note
Settings listed in this topic that you can control from more than one location within the
design entry tool are kept synchronized, regardless of which dialog box or window you use
to modify the setting.
Objects
Table 2-35. Display Control Window - Objects Tab Contents
Field Description
TheExpand button ( ) displays all subsections of the Objects tab.
The Collapse button ( ) hides all subsections of the Objects tab.
The Toggle hidden button switches between showing hidden items and
not showing hidden items. To hide an item row, right-click the item and
choose the Hide Selected row(s) menu item.
If you toggle to show hidden items, any items marked as hidden display in
orange. You can unhide one or more items by selecting them and right-
clicking, then selecting the Show selected row(s) menu item.
Favorites (optional)
<item_type> - Displays any Display Control window item that you add to the Favorites
<item_name> section by right-clicking on that item and choosing the Add to Favorites
menu item. The first time you add an item to the Favorites section, the
Favorites section displays with the item you added listed beneath in the
format: <item_type> - <item_name>. For example:
When you add an item to the Favorites section, the item displays in both
the Favorites section and in its original section/location. You can control
that item’s visibility in the schematic or Navigator windows from either of
those locations.
Appearance
Pin Type Arrows Toggles pin type arrow visibility on the schematic.
Half Size If the Pin Type Arrows option is enabled and this option is checked, the
arrow displays with only the upper half of the arrow showing. If the Pin
Type Arrows option is disabled, this option has no effect.
For additional information on the Half Size option, see the description for
Pintype Arrows in the topic “Settings Dialog Box - Advanced” on
page 403.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Color by Net If checked, any nets configured with a custom color from the
Setup > Settings menu item, Display category, Colored Nets
subcategory pane displays with the custom color.
If unchecked, nets configured with custom colors display with the default
net color rather than the custom color.
You define the default Net object color with the Setup > Settings menu
item, Display category, Objects subcategory, Objects pane.
Fill FPGA Area If checked, the tool shades the FPGA connectivity reserved areas on the
schematic.
Name Overbar If checked, the schematic displays negative-logic signals with an overbar,
such as UPPER_R/W.
Note: You designate a signal as negative logic when you initially
name the net using either the ~ or ^ prefix character, such as
~UPPER_R/W or ^UPPER_R/W. Enter which negative-logic character
the signals use as shown in the following figure:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Related Topics
Display Control Window - Properties Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Properties Tab
Use this window tab to control the visibility of specific properties on the schematic. Easy access
to the property visibility enables you to keep your work area uncluttered by hiding unneeded
data until you need to see it.
Note
You can also control property visibility from the Properties window (choose
View > Properties menu item). If a particular property is not set to be visible on an instance
from the Properties window, you cannot make it visible from the Display Control window
Properties tab. The View > Properties window hide setting takes precedence. If a property is
set to visible from the Properties window, you can use the Display Control window to hide it,
and later show it again.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Properties Tab
Objects
Table 2-36. Display Control Window - Properties Tab Contents
Field Description
TheExpand button ( ) displays all subsections of the Properties tab.
The Collapse button ( ) hides all subsections of the Properties tab.
The Toggle hidden button switches between showing hidden items and
not showing hidden items. To hide an item row, right-click the item and
choose the Hide Selected row(s) menu item.
If you toggle to show hidden items, any items marked as hidden display in
orange. You can unhide one or more items by selecting them and right-
clicking, then selecting the Show selected row(s) menu item.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Display Control Window - Properties Tab
Scheme Control Section - Once you configure the Display Control window, you
can save the configuration to a file. You can save multiple configuration schemes to different
files for later recall.
Indicates which saved scheme is active and enables you to switch between
schemes. To switch between schemes, click the dropdown arrow and
select a different scheme from the list.
Enables you to browse your file structure for a saved scheme and then
open it to reconfigure the Display Control window configuration.
Enables you to save the current Display Control window configuration to
a scheme. Click this button to display the Save Scheme dialog box, which
enables you to set the following parameters:
• Scheme name
Note: You can save the current window configuration to just one,
or all three, of the following scheme location choices:
• Save locally with design
• Save in working directory
• Save in user defined location — If you select this choice, you can
either browse to the location or enter the path in the text field.
Deletes the currently active scheme.
Related Topics
Display Control Window - Objects Tab
Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
File Viewer Utility Window
Use this dialog box to view the contents of log files generated by the design entry tool. These
files are located in the project’s ./LogFiles folder.
Figure 2-16. File Viewer Window
Description
The File Viewer Utility window is divided into two smaller windows. The smaller window on
the left contains a list of files, and the smaller window on the right displays the text of the file
that is selected on the left.
The menus at the top of the File Viewer Utility window provide you with all of the capabilities
you need to view and manage files. Additionally, a toolbar across the top of the File Viewer
Utility window provides buttons that allow you to easy access to more commonly used menu
items. You can also access additional context-sensitive menus in each of the smaller windows
by right-clicking in the window and choosing any of the popup menu items.
Note
You cannot copy and paste sections of one File Viewer file into another File Viewer file.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
File Viewer Utility Window
Objects
Field Description
Prints the active file.If no text is no highlighted, the tool prints the
,
entire file. If text is highlighted, the tool prints only the highlighted
portion.
To access from the menu: File > Print
Displays full pages of the selected file.
To access from the menu: File > Print Preview
Finds the text that you specify in the Find dialog box in the active
window. You can repeat the search from the last result by clicking the
Find Next button in the Find dialog box.
To access from the menu: Edit > Find and Edit > Find Next
Copies the selection and puts it on the Clipboard.
To access from the menu: Edit > Copy
Deletes the selected file.
To access from the menu: File > Delete
Displays files in a list.
To access from the menu: View > List
Displays information about each file in a window.
To access from the menu: View > Details
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to search for text, or to search for and replace text.
Figure 2-17. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box - PADS Designer
Objects
Table 2-37. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Find what Specifies the string of characters for which to search.The dropdown list provides
access to previously used search strings.
Within Defines the scope of your search.
Found Reports how many instances of the string were found
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box
Table 2-37. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
More >> Provides access to additional details to constrain or expand your text search. (Less
<< hides the additional details.)
• Look in - If checked, searches the specified area.
• Look for - Defines the type of text to look for. The dropdown list below the
options selects the scope of your search:
• Current Values - Searches the scope displayed in the Properties dialog box.
The scope can be symbol, block, or instance.
• All values - Searches all scopes. If the property has multiple values for
different scopes, the PADS Designer tool reports all values.
• Symbol values - Searches for the value on the central library symbol.
• Block values - Searches for values assigned to blocks in a flat hierarchy, or
to blocks at the top level of a hierarchical design. Does not search the
hierarchy below the block.
• Instance values - Searches for values on instances of a symbol anywhere in
a flat or hierarchical design.
• Options - Provides the following search limiters:
• Match case - If checked, any hits must match the exact upper and lower
case of the search string.
• Whole words - If checked, any hits must be a whole word. Ignores instances
where the search string is part of another word.
• Use wildcards - If checked, enables the following wildcard characters:
• * - for multiple characters
? - for any single character
Example 1:
Find Expression - ab*cd
Found String - abXYZcd
Replace Expression - klm*ryz
Replaced String - klmXYZryz
Example 2:
Find Expression - ad*y??
Found String - adXWYyZRF
Replace Expression - wert*tr??
Replaced String - wertXWYtrZR
• Use regular expressions - If checked, excludes the “Whole Words”
selection. See the topic “Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches” on
page 633.
• Search in selection - Searches only selected objects.
• Select properties only - (Find tab only.)
• Remove empty property - (Replace tab only.)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box
Table 2-37. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the search string and selects it
Find All Finds all occurrences of the search string and selects them. (Find tab only.)
Replace Specifies a character string to substitute for the found occurrences. (Replace tab
With only.)
Replace Replaces a single occurrence of the search string. (Replace tab only.)
Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the search string. (Replace tab only.)
Related Topics
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Font Mapping Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-38. PDF Writer Dialog Box Fonts Tab Contents
Option Description
Use PADS Designer Uses the settings from Setup > Settings menu item, Display
mapping category, Font Styles subcategory to map fonts.
Use stroke font Displays a dropdown list of stroke fonts from which to select.
Use PDF native font Enables you to choose a native PDF font.
• Native PDF Font button — Displays a list of the available native
PDF fonts from which to select.
• Sample Font Listing button — Opens a PDF document showing
examples of the available native PDF fonts.
Recommendation: For most efficient and portable results, use
Native PDF fonts.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Font Mapping Dialog Box
Table 2-38. PDF Writer Dialog Box Fonts Tab Contents (cont.)
Option Description
Use system scalable font Enables you to choose a system scalable font.
• System Scalable Font button — Displays a list of available
system scalable fonts (Windows fonts). Enables you to choose a
style and size for the font, and shows a sample of your selection.
The system scalable font you select overrides the selected stroke
font.
Related Topics
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Generate Symbol Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-39. Generate Symbol Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Block Input Specifies the currently selected block.
Symbol Output Specifies the symbol name. Uses the same name as the block name, by default,
to create the hierarchical association.
If Symbol Provides two options for handling the existing symbol:
Already Exists • Overwrite It — Selected, overwrites a symbol that has the name specified
in the Symbol Output field.
• Update It — If you make changes to an existing symbol, this updates the
symbol to include your changes.
Open Symbol If checked, opens the generated symbol for editing in the Symbol Editor.
in Symbol
Editor
Link the If checked, links the symbol to the block, and you cannot modify the Symbol
symbol to the name. The block and its corresponding symbol have the same name.
block If un-checked, you can create a new symbol starting from the interface of the
active block, but no link is preserved. Creates a new “independent” symbol.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Generate Symbol Dialog Box
Related Topics
Creating a Bottom-Up Hierarchical Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Insert Object Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-40. Insert Object Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Create New If selected, specifies that you want to insert a new object into the
document.
Create from File If selected, specifies that you want to insert an existing object into the
document.
Object Type Select the type of information you want to insert into the document.
Display as Icon If checked, display the link to the object as an icon in the document.
Result Describes the result of the selected option.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Keyin Netlister Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-41. Keyin Netlister Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Output File Name Specify the output file of the resulting Keyin netlist.
Scope Define the scope for the netlist file as one of the folowing:
• Project
• Board (specify which board form the dropdown list)
• Block (specify which block form the dropdown list)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Keyin Netlister Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab
Objects
Table 2-42. HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents
Field Description
Load Data from Start the retrieving process of the selected nets in the schematic.
PADS Designer
button
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab
Table 2-42. HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Connect to Connect to PADS Designer when the HyperLynx LineSim tool is started.
PADS Designer at Note: If this is selected, and you have nets selected in the schematic,
start the retrieving process is automatically started when LineSim is
started.
Selected Nets Display of selected nets.
Note: You can see all of the selected nets on the Schematic Topology
tab.
Tip: You can see all of the selected nets on the Schematic Topology tab.
Schematic Contents
Complete schematic Export using the complete schematic including interconnections.
Parts only Export using only the parts in the schematic, excluding interconnections.
schematic
Transmission Line Properties
Layer Determines the following transmission line parameters derived from the
layer stack-up:
• Copper thickness
• Dielectric thicknesses above and below
• Dielectric constants
LineSim assumes that a stack-up transmission line is routed on a board
with a plane layer. Stack-ups with no plane layers are allowed.
If a stack-up has not yet been defined for the current project, the default is
a six layer stack-up:
• Top side - external layer available for traces
• Ground Plane - not available for traces
• Inner signal layer - internal layer available for traces
• Inner signal layer - internal layer available for traces
• Power Plane - not available for traces
• Bottom side - external layer available for traces.
Default values for dielectric material type & thickness and copper weight
will be the same as those set by default in LineSim.
Length Defines the default transmission line length (trace length between pins in
a net) for simulation purposes. The default length is three inches (3000
mils).
Width Defines the default transmission line width. The default trace width is 6
mils (0.006 inches).
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab
Table 2-42. HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Passives Prefixes Shows all reference designator prefixes used for passive components. The
Type column is a fixed list of passive device types: Inductor, Capacitor,
Resistor, Ferrite Bead, Models. See “HyperLynx LineSim - Passives
Prefixes - Models Usage” on page 618.
Tip: Separate the list with a space, comma, or semicolon.
Supply Nets Shows all nets in the design that are voltage supply nets.
To add a supply net, scroll to the bottom of the Supply Nets list, click
twice, slowly, in the Net box, and type the name of the net. Type the
voltage value in the Voltage box.
Filename Specify the path to the LineSim FFS export or import file in the box, or
you can select the Browse button to browse to the design project file.
Export to Opens HyperLynx and generates a LineSim schematic file.
HyperLynx button Note: To activate this button, install HyperLynx on the same machine
as PADS Designer.
Import from Imports the information from the listed file and populates the dialog box
HyperLynx button fields. The PADS Designer tool compares the imported data with the
currently loaded schematic topology.
Note: To activate this button, install HyperLynx on the same machine
as PADS Designer.
See also “Merge Differences Dialog Box” on page 251.
Related Topics
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab
Exporting to HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Importing From HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab
Objects
Table 2-43. HyperLynx LineSim - Schematic Topology Tab Contents
Field Description
Schematic Lists all of the nets loaded from PADS Designer.
Topology list
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab
Related Topics
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab
Exporting to HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Importing From HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Merge Differences Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Merge Differences Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-44. Merge Differences Dialog Box - Schematic Topology tab Contents
Field Description
Current Topology Shows the topology retrieved from PADS Designer schematic or from
box previous import.
Imported Topology Shows the topology received from the current import.
box
Updated Properties Shows the updated property and values for the selected pin.
boxes
Accept button Back-annotates the model assignments.
Deny button Closes the dialog box without importing any new data.
Show stackup and Expands the dialog box to show more options.
trace changes
Changes in the Shows all changes made in the stackup.
stackup box
Layer Shows the layer on which the stackup resides.
Trace Width Shows the default transmission line length (trace length between pins in a
net) for simulation purposes.
Trace Length Shows the default transmission line width.
Related Topics
HyperLynx LineSim Dialog Box - Options Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
New Library Symbol Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-45. Library Symbol Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Symbol name Enter a name that is applied to the symbol.
Library Choose the desired library.
Symbol creation method Choose one of the following symbol creation methods:
• Open a new empty symbol in Symbol Editor.
See also “Symbol Creation and Editing” in the PADS
Schematic Design User’s Guide.
• Launch the Symbol Wizard.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
New Project Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to select a Project Template for a new project, and then set parameters such
as the project name, project location, and library location (if applicable).
Description
The Project Templates list box appears on the left side of the New Project dialog box. The right
side of the dialog box changes based on which Project Template you choose.
Objects
Table 2-46. New Project Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Name Specifies the name of the project
Location Specifies where the project is located on the network. You can
use the Browse button to navigate to a specific location
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
New Project Dialog Box
Related Topics
Creating a Design Entry Tool Project [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Project Templates [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Open Block Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-47. Open Block Dialog Box Fields
Fields Description
Look in Specifies the project that contains the block.
Block name Specifies the name of the block.
Block of type Specifies a block type to use to filter the list.
Open Opens the specified block in the schematic window.
Cancel Aborts the procedure and closes the window.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box
• Package button ( )
Use this dialog box to configure the Packager, which prepares the project for forward
annotation by assigning reference designators to map each component in the logical schematic
to a physical part.
Figure 2-28. Packager Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-48. Packager Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Project Displays the current project file or enables you to browse to a
project file.
Packaging Options — By default, the Packager maintains existing component packages and
minimizes the number of parts used by placing components into unused gates. Use the following
packaging options to control packaging behavior.
Operation • Package Symbols — Maintains any existing packaging. The
packager only packages new or unpackaged components.
Default.
• Repackage All Symbols — The Packager removes all the
Frozen Package properties and packages all components,
including previously packaged components.
• Repackage Unfixed Symbols — Packages all components
except those that have a Frozen Package property value of Fix.
• Verify Packaging — Checks the design to verify that it will
package correctly. Writes errors to the partpkg.log file.
Optimization If you have chosen either of the “Repackage” options in the
Operation field, this field is not applicable and is greyed out.
From the dropdown list, choose one of the following:
• Board — Enables symbols to be combined into packages
regardless of the symbol’s location within the schematic.
Default.
• Block — This option only allows symbols within the same
block to be combined into packages.
• Page — This option only allows symbols on the same page to
be combined into packages.
Scope A dropdown list displays the blocks that make up a design and the
sheets that make up each block.
If you leave the Scope field blank, the Packager works on the entire
design.
If you choose a block, the Packager narrows the scope to all sheets
in that block.
If you choose a particular sheet from one of the blocks, the
Packager narrows the operation scope even further to just that
sheet.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box
Related Topics
Packaging a Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Select Parts to Update Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
PADS Designer To PADS Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-49. PADS Designer To PADS Contents
Field Description
Central Library Defines the path and filename of the central library.
Select template Specifies a start-up file for the new PCB design file, which you choose from
the dropdown list.
PCB file Specifies the path and filename of a PADS Layout PCB file. If the PCB file
does not exist, the PADS Designer tool creates it.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab
Table 2-50. PADS PDF Dialog Box - General Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Add popup menu If checked, creates a shortcut menu in the generated PDF file for each
on components component in the design. When you click a component in Adobe Acrobat,
the shortcut menu displays the symbol name, properties, and the option to
push to the underlying schematic if the component is a composite, as shown
below:
Note: Point to the shortcut menu, such as “Symbol” (as shown above) to
display the sub-menu.
Visible If checked, displays a box around hyperlink text in the PDF. Click the link to
Component/Net go to the text associated with the hyperlink.
Hyperlinks
Start PDF If checked, starts the PDF Reader.
Reader After
Generation
Change ICTs to If checked, creates a bitmap of a schematic representation of the
schematics Interconnectivity Table (ICT), including the ICT’s components and
connectivity. The components appear in a best-guess location, but the
placement is not editable.
Related Topics
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Exporting Design Documentation in PDF Format [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
Objects
Table 2-51. PADS PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab Contents
Field Description
Stop At Stops the printing at the level specified by the property entered here.
Property Default: STD.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
Table 2-51. PADS PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
URL-valued Specifies properties whose values are potential URLs. PDF Writer generates
Properties links in the PDF file for the values of these properties.To add properties to the
list, type the property name(s) in the box. This causes the property name to
show up in the PDF output surrounded by a link box to the actual URL.
Rules:
• You must use forward slashes (/) when specifying URL-valued properties.
Do not use backslashes (\).
• If the property name contains more than one string, such as “Arbitrary
Text”, enclose the strings in double quotes.
• If you are entering multiple property names, place a space between names.
Schematic Sets the specific order in which to process sheets in a schematic hierarchy.
Sheet Order Rule: Make sure that each composite block has a component-level property
Property with a specific name whose value is an integer as the starting page number for
that set of schematic sheets.
Note: Point to the shortcut menu, such as “Symbol” (as shown above) to
display the sub-menu.
Minimum line Sets the width for all lines in the schematic including boxes, arcs, and so on.
thickness This value is a scale factor (default of 1.00 = 100%). If you want to increase
the line thicknesses two times over their present thickness, use a value of 2.00
(200%). To decrease line thicknesses by 1/2, use a value of 0.50 (50%).
Rule: This setting does not change text thickness.
Stroke font line Specifies the line width for stroke fonts.
width
Use exclusion If checked, excludes any sheets from the PDF file that you have specified to
info exclude. See “Excluding Sheets From Printing or PDF Generation” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Related Topics
PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab
Exporting Design Documentation in PDF Format [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Fonts Tab
Tip
To change PADS Designer default font settings, choose the Setup > Settings menu item,
click the Display category, and click the Font Styles subcategory.
PDF Writer reads an PADS Designer schematic, generates a hierarchical representation of the
schematic design, and then saves the design as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file.
You can map any PADS Designer font types to one of the following:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-52. PADS PDF Dialog Box Fonts Tab Contents
Field Description
DxD Font Name Displays the available PADS Designer font types.
PDF Font Displays the font mapping for each PADS Designer font type. (You
can change the font mapping from the “Font Mapping Dialog Box”
on page 239.)
Browse (...) button Opens the Font Mapping dialog box for the associated PDF Font so
that you can change the font mapping.
Use PADS Designer font If checked, uses the font mapping defined in the Setup > Settings
mappings menu item, Display category, Font Styles subcategory.
If not checked, uses the font mapping you select in the “Font
Mapping Dialog Box” on page 239.
Scale Factor Increases or reduces text size. The scaling factor is a percentage
value. The higher the value, the larger the text size.
Related Topics
PDF Writer Dialog Box - General Tab
PDF Writer Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
Font Mapping Dialog Box
Description
A list of panes appears on the left side of the Part Lister dialog box as shown in Figure 2-32. The
right side of the dialog box changes based on which pane you choose:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box
Object
The Config Name field at the bottom of the Part Lister dialog box shown in Figure 2-32
specifies the name of the Part Lister configuration.
When you click the Config Name field list button, a popup menu provides a list of
configurations found by the Part Lister tool in the configuration file search order. If you do not
provide a name, Part Lister tool uses the first configuration file it finds in the search order.
For more information about configuration files and the default files provided with the tool, see
“The Part Lister Configuration File” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note
If you change any of the Part Lister dialog box settings to create a BOM, the Part Lister tool
saves a new configuration file in your project directory.
The tool provides several pre-defined configurations, as shown in the popup list of
configurations of Figure 2-33.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box
• PartsListerDefaults — Specifies a text format file (.txt) BOM of part numbers sorted by
reference designator as shown in Example 2-3.
Example 2-3. PartsListerDefaults BOM
• PipedPartNumbers — Specifies a text format file (.txt) BOM of part numbers sorted by
reference designators. Suffixes of “piped” part numbers are ignored.
• PipedPartNumbersHTML — Specifies an HTML format file (.htm) BOM of part
numbers sorted by reference designators. Suffixes of “piped” part numbers are ignored.
• PipedPartNumbersXLS — Specifies an Excel spreadsheet format file (.xlsx) BOM of
part numbers sorted by reference designators. Suffixes of “piped” part numbers are
ignored.
• SingleLinePerRefDes — Specifies a text format file (.txt) BOM of part numbers sorted
by reference designators and a single line per reference designator as shown in
Example 2-4.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box
Related Topics
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Generating Bills of Materials [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Objects
Table 2-53. Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane Contents
Field Description
Output File Name Specify the name of the output file. You can use the folder icon to browse
to an existing folder.
The default name in the text box is the name of the open project, with an
appropriate extension based on the settings for “Output” in the Advanced
pane.
Scope
Select one of the following scopes for the Part Lister to operate on:
• Project
• Board (specify which board from the dropdown list)
• Block (specify which block from the dropdown list)
Options
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Table 2-53. Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Open the Check to open the generated file at the conclusion of the Part Lister
generated file process.
Open with Check, and then specify the tool to use to read the file.
Options Specify options for the tool you specified to read the file. For example, if
you specify notepad.exe in the Open with field, you could use the /A option
to open the file as ANSI.
Config Name See “Part Lister Dialog Box” on page 267.
Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Objects
Table 2-54. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents
Field Description
Output: format Specifies the type of output file from the dropdown list as one of the
following:
• Text File (PLAIN) — Produces a text file output such as:
Part Lister output for Board1
Generated on Monday, March 21, 2011
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost
--------------------------------------------------
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32
2 1 CONN14P U3
...
6 3 R47-2512 R1-R3 0.50
------
8.14
• HTML — Produces an HTML file, such as:
Part Lister output for Board1 Generated on Monday, March 21, 2011
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Table 2-54. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Output: file Specifies the file extension of the output file. Automatically updates
extension depending on the setting specified in the format dropdown list.
Add Title Rows Specifies whether or not to include Column Titles (defined on the Header
pane) at the top of each column.
Examples:
• If checked — (The bolded lines in the following example show the title
rows added:)
Part Lister output for Board1Generated on Thursday,
March 24, 2011
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost
----------------------------------------------
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32
...
If unchecked, the Part List uses the column settings as shown in the
following example:
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost
----------------------------------------------
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32
2 1 CONN14P U3
3 1 74LS08-SMD U2 1.32
4 2 C1825-1U-63-10 C1-C2
5 2 R10K-603 R4-R5
6 3 R47-2512 R1-R3 0.50
--------
8.14
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Table 2-54. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Delimiter
Specifies a delimiter to use between the columns. Use the > button to select
either the \t (Tab) or the \ (Backslash) characters as a delimiter. Or, specify
your own delimiter in the text box, as shown in the second example below.
Examples:
• (Null - no delimiter)
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost
----------------------------------------------
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32
2 1 CONN14P U3
Also see the “Before first column” and “After last column” in the next table
row
Before first Adds the delimiter specified in the Delimiter text box in front of the first
column column.
After first column If checked, the Part Lister adds the delimiter specified in the Delimiter text
box after the last column.
Example: (If both Before first column and After first column are checked:)
Variant Database
Config Specifies the pathname to a variant component database configuration file
(.dbc). Enables you to create BOMs for variants of a design.
Config Name See “Part Lister Dialog Box” on page 267.
Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
You define and control Part Lister output columns in the left-side list box of the Columns pane
as shown in Figure 2-37. The configuration file (PartListerDefaults.ipl by default) defines the
content and settings of the columns pane, as shown in Figure 2-36. The example in Figure 2-37
shows how you can add your own column to this list (such as “Cost”) and delete others (such as
“Value” and “Description”). The buttons above the columns list enable you to customize the
columns as follows:
When you select a column from the column list, the right side of the Columns pane changes to
show the current configuration of the selected column. The following table in this topic
describes the settings accessible on the Columns pane for a selected column.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Objects
Table 2-55. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents
Field Description
Type Choose a column type as one of the following:
• Number — The column represents sequential row numbers.
• Quantity — The column represents quantities.
• System — The column represents internal PADS Designer properties.
• Property — The column represents the value of a predefined property, as
selected in the Property pull-down list.
• Text — The column represents text, which you specify in the Text box.
Note: Depending on which type you choose, other settings are not
applicable.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Table 2-55. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Property/ If Type = Property, this field provides a pull-down list of the available Common
Text/System Properties (.prp) used to gather values for the selected column.
Additionally, this field supports the following properties not in the list of
Common Properties (manually enter one of these in the field rather than use the
dropdown list):
• Name
• Id
• Partition
• Symbol Name
• Sheet
• Sheet Number
• Block
If the Type = Text, you enter a text value that displays in the selected column.
If the Type = System, you choose an PADS Designer internal property from the
Property dropdown list.
Display
Align From the dropdown list, choose column alignment as one of the following:
• Center
• Left
• Right
Width Specify the column width in characters. The value is an integer in the range 1-
1000. Any text longer than the specified width is right-justified, and the last
character is replaced with a hyphen (-).
Mode If Type = Property, select the column mode as one of the following:
• Full — Values for all objects are displayed as a list. The values are sorted
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value repeats the appropriate number of times.
• Slots — Values for all objects display as a list. The values sort
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value repeats the appropriate number of times. The slot values are appended
after a slash character (such as: U1/1, U1/2, U2/1).
• Compress — All values sort alphanumerically. Repeated values are removed.
Ranges such as A1, A2, A3 shorten to A1-A3. Slots are never appended.
• Unique — All values sort alphanumerically. Repeated values are removed. A
list such as IC1, IC1, IC2, IC3, IC3, IC5 shortens to IC1, IC2, IC3, IC5.
• Total — The column displays the total of all numeric values for all objects.
Non-numeric values are ignored.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Table 2-55. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Decimal If Type = Property, define the number of decimal places (digits after decimal
point). If the value displayed in the column is not a real number, the Part Lister
ignores this setting.
If you specify 0 in the Decimal field, all numbers in the selected column round to
the nearest integer value.
Hidden If checked, the output does not display the column. Note that even if a column is
not visible, the Part Lister might use it for sort order.
List If Type = Property and Display Mode = Full or Compressed, sets the separator
Delimiter used if a list of values displays in a column. Can be any string of characters.
Default: space character.
Sort If Type = Property and you define a Primary Key (see Part Lister option More >
Primary Key in the following row), then you can set whether the output sorts by
the contents of the column. Choose one of the following sort options:
• None — The selected column does not determine the sorting order.
• Ascending — The selected column content sorts in ascending order.
• Descending — The selected column content sorts in descending order.
• Priority — Prerequisite - Ascending or Descending is selected. This field
determines the sorting priority if more than one column has the Sort
attribute set to Ascending or Descending.
The valid value is an integer in the range 0-9. The value 9 means the
highest priority. The Part Lister sorts the column with the highest priority
first. If duplicate values occur in this first column, the Part Lister continues
the sort using lower priority columns. If there is more than one column
with the same priority, the order of column definitions (from left to right in
the output) determines the priority.
The sort is alphanumeric (meaning that A2 goes before A11) and case-
insensitive.
See also “BOM Output Example: Sorting Rows With Columns Designated as
Primary” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Table 2-55. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
More If Type = Property, you have the option of additional column settings as follows:
• Primary Key (Required) — If checked, determines which column the Part
Lister uses as the primary sort. You must apply this primary sort key to at
least one column of type Property, such as the default column Part Number as
shown in the following Example Output.
If a Primary Key is not present on one of the columns, the Part Lister output
is blank.
• Secondary Key — If checked, determines which column to sort on if there
are identical values listed in the Primary Key row. Apply the secondary sort
key to at least one column of type Property, such as the default column Ref
Designator as shown in the following Example Output.
• Sum row values — If checked, totals the numerical value of all data in the
column. See the Cost column in the following Example Output.
If the result of the summing produces more than the maximum number of
digits allowed for a particular field (specified by width), the sum total
truncates on the right side. To indicate that a truncation has occurred, the Part
Lister places a hyphen (“-”) on the right side of the total.
Example Output:
----------------------------------------------------------
|# |QTY |Part Number |Ref Designator |Cost |
-----------------------------------------------------------
| 1 | 1 |74LS08-SMD |U2 |1.32 |
...
| 6 | 3 |R47-2512 |R1-R3 |0.50, |
| | | | |0.50,0.50 |
| | | | |--------- |
| | | | |8.14 |
Config See “Part Lister Dialog Box” on page 267.
Name
Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header
Objects
Table 2-56. Part Lister Dialog Box - Header Pane Contents
Field Description
Use Custom If checked, the text you enter in the Header text box appears at the top of
Header the Part Lister output.
Header
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header
Table 2-56. Part Lister Dialog Box - Header Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
(text box) Enter and edit text in this box to customize the header text that appears at
the top of each Part Lister Report. The Part Lister provides the following
fields to help you customize the header:
• $(NAME) - Name of the Project, Board or Block (see example below)
• $(DATE) - As shown in the example below
• $(TIME) - such as 14:45:28 (hh:mm:ss)
• $(VARIANT) - If PADS Designer is in the Variant mode (meaning that
the variant view was created in the EVM window), this field displays
the data specified in the current variant.
Tip: To add a blank line between the Header and the first row, place a
<Return> after the Header followed by one or more spaces.
Example 1:
Part Lister output for $(NAME)
Generated on $(DATE)
The above default header text results in the following (as an example):
Part Lister output for Board1
Generated on Thursday, November 30, 2012
Tip: To add a predefined property to the text box from a list, in the text
enter $( (dollar sign + left paren). Double-click a property from the list
to add it to the text box.
Config Name See “Part Lister Dialog Box” on page 267.
Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Paste Special Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Paste Special Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-57. Paste Special Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Displays the name of the source data and its location. If the data was copied
from an application that did not provide the source data and its location to
the Clipboard, such as a MS-DOS based application, “Unknown Source”
appears.
Paste If selected, inserts the Clipboard contents into a document. See Example 1
in Figure 2-39.
Paste Link If selected, inserts the Clipboard contents into a document and creates a link
to another application as shown in Example 2 in Figure 2-39.
This button is available only when the Clipboard contents come from an
application whose contents data can be linked to the schematic editor.
Save the file containing the information you want to link before you copy
the information to the Clipboard.
As Specify the type of information you want to paste from the Clipboard. Some
of the possibilities are shown as follows:
Graphic A graphic representation of the Clipboard contents and the data needed to
edit an object. The name of the object in the list depends on the type of
contents on the Clipboard.
Formatted Text Text with Formatting — for example, Microsoft Excel table formatting.
Picture A graphic representation of information, such as a Windows metafile.
Bitmap A graphic representation used by pictures from other applications, such as
Paintbrush for Windows.
Display As Icon If checked, displays the pasted object using an icon. Example 2 in
Figure 2-39 shows the pasted object using the Adobe Acrobat Document
icon.
If unchecked, displays the pasted object as a simulated representation.
Example 1 in Figure 2-39 shows the pasted object as a page from the Adobe
Acrobat Document.
Change Icon If you check Display As Icon, use this button to display the Change Icon
button dialog box, which enables you to choose a different icon.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window
Description
You toggle the window visibility by clicking the design synchronization indicator light in the
status bar at the bottom of the application as shown in the following figure:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window
Objects
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Project Integration Window
Related Topics
Updating a Project With Changed Library Content [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Properties Window
Properties Window
To access:
• View > Properties
• Properties button ( )
• Double-click an object
• Select an object, and right-click and choose Properties (popup menu item).
Use this window to view property information associated with the selected object. You can also
add or modify property values, control property visibility, and add properties to the selected
object.
Objects
• The Properties window content changes based on the selected object as shown in the
following example Properties window.
Figure 2-41. Properties Window - Example
Related Topics
Creating a User-Defined Property for a Netlist Project [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Component Property [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Replicating a Package Pattern [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Properties Window
Changing the Value of a Component Property [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Restoring/Repositioning Symbol Properties to Defined Locations [PADS Schematic Design Us-
er's Guide]
User Interface Customization [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Property Editing Rules
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box
The Property Definition Editor Dialog Box Contents table describes the Property Definition
Dialog Box fields.
The Default Values and Ranges in the Property Definition Editor table describes the default
values and ranges used by the Property Definition Editor.
The Regular Expressions Used by Property Definition Editor table describes the regular
expressions used by the Property Definition Editor.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box
Figure 2-42. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box- Netlist Project Only
Objects
Table 2-58. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Properties file Provides the path to the .prp file. Use the New Properties File button
( ) to specify a new properties file.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box
Table 2-59. Default Values and Ranges in the Property Definition Editor
Attribute Default Options
Property Number Old number Integer
Note: Property Number information
displays but cannot be edited. This
enables you to correct any problems that
occur if you have duplicate property
names.
Regular Expressions (see the Regular “*” (editable) Any regular expression string
Expressions Used by Property Definition
Editor table)
Maximum number of characters 132 (editable) 1 - 255
Maximum number of lines 1 (editable) 1 - xxx
Default Text Height .08 (editable) Any height
Visible No Yes / No
Instanced Allowed Single Single / Multiple
Overrideable Yes Yes / No
Default Font Default (editable) Dropdown list of available
fonts
Default Color Red (editable) Dropdown list of available
colors
Regular expressions can be built up from the “single-character” regular expressions in the
following table:
Table 2-60. Regular Expressions Used by Property Definition Editor
Character Description
c Any ordinary character not listed in this table. An ordinary character matches
itself.
\ Backslash. When followed by a special character, the regular expression
matches the “quoted” character.
. Matches any single character.
[c..] A non-empty string of characters, enclosed in square brackets, matches any
single character in the string. For example [abcdef] matches any single
character from the set 'abcdef'. When the first character of a string is a caret (^),
then the regular expression matches any character except those in the remainder
of the string. For example, [^12345] matches any character except '12345'. A
caret in any other position is interpreted as an ordinary character.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane
Objects
Table 2-61. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Contents
Field Description
Output File Name Sets the location where the .txt netlist output file is located.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane
Table 2-61. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Scope Choose one of the following scopes:
• Project — Netlist the entire project. If selected, the Output File Name
field changes to Output Folder with an empty line, which indicates the
project folder is the default.
• Board — Netlist just the board you specify from the associated
dropdown list. If selected, the Output File Name field changes to
<board_name>.qcv.
• Block — Netlist just the block you specify from the associated
dropdown list. If selected, the Output File Name changes to
<block_name>.qcv.
Options
Open the If checked, you have the choice of the following:
generated file • Open with — Check this option to specify the text viewer you want to
use, such as C:\Windows\System32\notepad.exe.
• Run new viewer for each generated file — Check this option to specify
a new text viewer for each netlist run.
Send generated If checked, the output appears in a separate Quick Connection View in the
data into Output Output window
Window
Related Topics
The QCV Netlist Output Format
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane
Objects
Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents
Field Description
Display Nets If checked, the QCV output displays nets based on the following settings:
• Flat Mode — If checked, the output netlist displays the FlatNet name
above each group of related nets as shown in the following example
(Single Line Per Net is also set in this example):
FlatNet: PAR
NET : '/MICRO1/AMD_8111_TO_HUB1/PAR' PAR-B1 U29-AF6
NET : '/MICRO1/PAR'
NET : '/MICRO1/PCI_CONN1/PAR' J_PCI-A43 PAR-B1
• Compress Flat Nets — (Only available if Flat Mode is checked).
If checked, the output netlist displays the FlatNet name preceding the
compressed net and also eliminates the hierarchical pins. The following
example shows the compressed PAR net from above:
. . .
FlatNet: 'PAR' PAR-B1 U29-AF6 J_PCI-A43 PAR-B1
. . .
The three '/MICRO1/... net lines are listed without the FlatNet line
preceding them.
• Class Mode — If checked, groups nets by class in a separate section of
the netlist as noted by the following entry:
# begin ‘(Default)’ NetClass nets
. . .
• Display Properties/Net Classes — If checked, adds Property and
NetClass information for each net such as the following:
NET : '/$1I17/$1I49/PAR' J_PCI-A43
NET : '/$1I17/$1I49/PAR' J_PCI-A43Property:
NetClass=(Default)NET : '/$1I17/$1I49/PAR' J_PCI-A43
. . .
(Display Nets description is continued in the next table row)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane
Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Nets • Single Line Per Net — If checked, QCV configures the output to put all
(continued) large nets on one line (20 is the maximum number of pins displayed per
net before a line break is issued) as shown in the following example:
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C46-2 C209-2 C210-2 C49-2
...
(all /RLDRAM1/GND nets are listed on one, possibly long, line)
If unchecked, QCV configures the output to break large nets into
separate lines as shown in the following example:
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' GND-B C206-2 C46-2 C209-2 C210-2
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C49-2 C52-2 C53-2 U32-A2 U32-A4 ...
(The /RLDRAM1/GND nets are listed on multiple lines)
• Only Global Net — If checked, the QCV output only lists global nets
such as the following (in this example, the Display Power/Ground
separately option was also checked):
# begin Power&Ground net list
NET : '/$1I49/GND' C1-1
NET : '/$1I72/GND' U1-10 U2-7 C2-1
• Separate No/Single Pin Nets — (Only available if “Only No/Single Pin
Nets” is unchecked.) If checked, QCV configures the output to list the
“No/Single Pin nets” in a separate section of the netlist as noted by the
following entry:
# begin one pin nets list
• Only No/Single Pin Nets — (Only available if “Separate No/Single Pin
Nets” is unchecked.) If checked, QCV displays just the no/single pin
nets.
(Display Nets description is continued in the next table row)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane
Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Nets • Display Power/Ground separately — If unchecked, QCV displays the
(continued) power and ground nets in the list with other nets as shown with the
ground net RLDRAM1/GND in the following example:
NET : '/RLDRAM1/CLK' U32-J12 U33-J12 U34-J12 U35-J12
...
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2 C213-2
...
NET : '/RLDRAM1/NCS0' U32-L2 U34-L2 U36-L2 U38-L2
...
(The /RLDRAM1/GND net is listed with other non-power/non-ground
nets such as /RLDRAM1/CLK and /RLDRAM1/NCS0.)
If checked, QCV displays the power and ground nets separate from
other nets instead of being merged with them.
# begin Power&Ground net list
. . .NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2
C213-2 ...
(The /RLDRAM1/GND net is listed in a section with other power/
ground nets.)
— If checked, you have the following options on how to split the
Power/Ground nets: (For more information see “Explicit/Implicit
Power Supply Definition” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide).
• Differentiate Power from Ground
• Split the Power/Ground into:
(Continued in the next table row)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane
Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Nets • Differentiate Power from Ground — If checked, QCV separates the
(continued) Power and Ground nets into the following separate sections:
# begin Power nets list
NET : '/MICRO1/1.25V' 184PINX72DDR_LWR1-DDR_VREF ...
...
NET : '/POWER_BLOCK1/0.9V' C34-1 U42-2 U42-4
...
# begin Ground nets list
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' U32-A2 U32-A4 U32-A9 U32-B4 U32-B9
...
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane
Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display If checked, the output QCV netlist displays a separate components list
Components section that identifies components as shown in the following example:
# begin components list
COMP: '74LS374-SMD' 'U1' 'Logic:ls374.1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R3' 'Discrete:RES.1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R2' 'Discrete:RES.1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R1' 'Discrete:RES.1'
COMP: 'C1825-1U-63-10' 'C1' 'Discrete:c_linear_v.1'
COMP: 'C1825-1U-63-10' 'C2' 'Discrete:c_linear_v.1'
. . .
• Parts Mode — (Only available if Display Components is checked.)
If checked, the QCV display limits the output (from preceding example)
to the following:
# begin components list
COMP: '74LS374-SMD' 'U1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R3'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R2'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R1'
. . .
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane
Table 2-62. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Un- If checked, the QCV output lists the unconnected pins that terminate with a
connected Pins via No Connect Symbol (by TERM):
No Connect # begin un-connected pins list
PIN : '/U1' U1-11 (by TERM)
Note: This option only works if the Include terminated nets (No
Connect) option is unchecked on the Advanced page.
For more information, see the following:
“Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net
Stubs)” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Related Topics
The QCV Netlist Output Format
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
Objects
Table 2-63. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Contents
Field Description
Sort Choose how you want the output to be sorted as one of the following:
• None — No sort is specified
• Ascending — QCV orders each section of the output alphabetically A -
Z and numerically 1 - 9.
• Descending — QCV orders each section alphabetically Z - A and
numerically 9 - 1.
Filter Choose how you want the output to be filtered:
None, Ref. Des., Net Name, Part, or Class.
For filters other than None, enter the appropriate value.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
Table 2-63. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Special
Exclude Special If checked, exclude special components from the output.
Component
Use labels in paths If checked, labels appear in the output paths as shown in bold in the
following example:
'/HF_lpfilter/GND' U1-10 U2-7 C2-1
If unchecked, the output does not use labels in the paths, but uses a unique
identifier as shown in bold in the following example:
'/$1I72/GND' U1-10 U2-7 C2-1
Include terminated If checked, the QCV output lists nets that terminate with a No Connect
nets (No Connect) Symbol.
Note: If this option is checked, the Display Un-connected Pins via No
Connect on the Display page has no affect.
Also see the following:
“Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net
Stubs)in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Related Topics
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
The QCV Netlist Output Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Part Window
Field Description
Source Part Number Specify the part that you want to replace.
Note: If you invoke the Replace Part window by right-
clicking the part to replace and choosing the Replace Part
menu item, this field is already filled in.
Scope Click the dropdown arrow and select the scope for the
replacement from the list:
• Project — The entire project and all hierarchy
• Board — The active board and all hierarchy
• Schematic — The active schematic, excluding hierarchy
• Schematic Down Hierarchy — The active schematic,
including hierarchy
• Sheet — The active sheet, excluding hierarchy
• Sheet Down Hierarchy — The active sheet, including
hierarchy
• Initial selection — The selected part(s)
Note: If you invoke the Replace Part window by right-
clicking the selected part(s) to replace and choosing the
Replace Part menu item, the Scope defaults to Initial selection.
Replacement Part Number Specify the part that you want to use as a replacement. You can
either:
• Type the name of the replacement part in the field.
• Drag-and-drop the part from the PADS Designer Databook
window’s component pane.
• Drag-and-drop the part from the PADS Designer Search
window’s Library - Parts tab.
Tip: You must specify a valid replacement part number
before continuing.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Part Window
Field Description
Assistant If checked, displays the Replace Assistant when you click the
Replace button. The Replace Assistant enables you to choose one
of the following:
• Replace All — Replaces all un-replaced source parts with the
replacement part.
• Replace — Replaces the currently selected source part with
the replacement part, and selects the next part in the selection
series.
• Skip — Skips over the currently selected part without
replacing it, and selects the next part in the selection series.
• Cancel — Cancels the replacement process.
Preserve Ref Designator If checked, preserves the existing reference designator on the
replacement part.
Note: If you do not check this box, you will need to run the
packager later.
Part(s) found list Lists part numbers that match the source part number value
within the specified scope.
Advanced Click the plus sign (+) to expand the advanced options. Click the
minus sign (-) to hide these options. Click the Pin Mapping
button to open the Pin Mapping dialog box. Click the Properties
button to open the Property Mapping dialog box.
Pin Mapping button Displays the Pin Mapping dialog box, which displays all of the
pins of the Source Part (left side) and the Replacement Part (right
side). This dialog box enables you to control pin mapping. Use
the choices at the top of the dialog box to configure the dialog box
to:
• Map by Pin Number — Maps the pin numbers of the Source
Part to pin numbers on the Replacement Part.
• Map by Pin Name — Maps the pin names on the Source Part
to pin names on the Replacement Part.
• Map selected rows — Maps just the rows you select.
• Remove Mapping — Removes all mapping.
The results of your mapping display in the Mapped Pins section
of the dialog box.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Part Window
Field Description
Properties button Displays the Property Mapping dialog box, which displays all of
the properties associated with the schematic source part and the
properties associated with the library definitions of the
replacement part. You can set the properties mapping to one of
the following:
• Library Only — On the replacement part, only use the
properties specified by the library part definition.
• Schematic wins —When a part instance property is duplicated
on the schematic and in the library part definition, use the
value on the schematic instance for the replacement part.
• Library wins — When a part instance property is duplicated
on the schematic and in the library part definition, use the
value in the library part definition for the replacement part.
Related Topics
Replacing a Symbol, Part, or Decal [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-64. Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Replace selected Click the Browse button to open the DataBook window, the CL View tab,
symbol(s)/part(s) from which you can choose a symbol to be used for the replacement.
with:
Preserve “Ref If checked, the replacement symbol retains the pre-existing Ref
Designator” Designator.
Replace part To modify the part number for the replacement select either of the
following:
• Symbol only — Only the symbol is replaced.
• Replace part with — Use the associated list box to select a new part
that is used to replace the selected part.
Replace selection Select one of the following:
in • Active sheet — Replaces the symbol in only the active sheet.
• All open sheets — Replaces the symbol in all open sheets.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box
Related Topics
Replacing a Symbol, Part, or Decal [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
RINF Netlister Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-65. RINF Netlister Dialog Box
Field Description
Output File Name Specify the output file of the resulting RINF netlist.
Scope Define the scope for the netlist file as one of the following:
• Project
• Board (specify which board form the dropdown list)
• Block (specify which block form the dropdown list)
Options If checked, the “Open the generated file” option enables you to
specify:
• Open with — Specify the program you want to use to open the
file (use the Browse button or specify the path to the viewer
program).
• Run new viewer for each generated file — Spawns a separate
view for each generated file.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Scale Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to scale the selected object up or down using a scale factor that you specify.
Figure 2-48. Scale Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-66. Scale Dialog Box Option
Field Description
Scale Factor Select the scale factor to use. Use a number greater than 1 to enlarge and a
number between 0 and 1 to reduce.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Select Parts to Update Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-67. Select Parts to Update Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Out-of-sync parts Displays the out-of-sync part number, the timestamp of the part in
the project, and the timestamp of the part in the library.
Select All If checked, selects all rows in the table.
Related Topics
Packaging a Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project
Figure 2-50. Settings Dialog Box - Example Project Settings for Netlist
Template
Objects
Table 2-68. Settings Dialog Box- Project Contents
Field Description
Central Library (Not available in a Netlist project)
Path Defines the path to the central library. Enter a pathname or browse to the
location.
Special Specify the path to the Special Components
Components Also see “Editing the Special Components List” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project
Any other designer who opens the same sheet sees the same bar.
The first designer who clicks the Click to Edit button gets read-write access to
the sheet. All other designers then see a message in the information bar that
describes who has locked the sheet as follows:
If the Hide button is clicked, the information bar is hidden, but a thin yellow bar
is visible at the top of the schematic window. Click on the bar to expand the
information bar again. If the text in the information bar changes while it is
hidden, it flashes a few times to let you know something changed.
See also “The Multi-User Environment” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Layout Tool (Netlist project only)
Choose your layout tool from the dropdown list.
Use Custom (Netlist project only)
Constraints File If checked, specify a location to a Constraints Definition file.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Board
Objects
Table 2-69. Settings Dialog Box - Boards# Contents
Field Description
Top level block Specify the top level block from the dropdown list.
Allow forward If checked, allow forward annotation.
annotation
Allow back annotation If checked, allow back annotation.
Note: If unchecked, the Packager (Tools > Package menu item)
ignores the setting. The Packager updates both the Pin Numbers and
Ref Designators regardless of this setting.
Conflict resolution
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Board
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries
Objects
Table 2-70. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries Fields
Field Description
Main window Enables you to add or delete names of and paths to legacy symbol libraries.
Import Imports selected legacy symbol libraries into the current project.
Related Topics
Working With Symbols and Components [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Special Components
Objects
Table 2-71. Settings Dialog Box - Special Components Fields
Field Description
Dropdown list Specifies the type of pin component to display in the window.
New Insert button Enables you to select components, of the type specified in the dropdown
list, to add to the display.
Related Topics
Editing the Special Components List [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents
Note
When you instantiate a predefined bus such as A(7:0),B(7:0) on the schematic, each net
ripped from this bus always uses the full bus name, regardless of whether the setting “Use
Full Bus Name on Ripper” is unchecked (disabled) in the Setup > Settings menu item,
Advanced category. In this example, every net ripped from this bus uses A(7:0),B(7:0) as the
property Name value.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents
Objects
Table 2-72. Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents Fields
Fields Description
Name Lists the names of available buses. You can select the name to edit it.
Value Displays the values for each bus in the list. You can select the value to edit its
contents.
Related Topics
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Creating and Editing Predefined Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones
• Zoning Grid
• Border (box)
• Zone Labels (section), Border
• Zone Labels (section), Left-Top Corner of Each Zone
Tip
To see these various Zone indicators, it might be helpful to turn off (uncheck) the
schematic grid which you can access at Setup > Settings menu item, Project
Schematic Editor category, Display Grid checkbox.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones
Objects
Table 2-73. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones Contents
Field Description
(list of available Use the list of available border types to select which one you want to
border types) customize.
Add — Click this button to specify a new border. The New Size dialog
box appears to allow you to specify the height and width of the new
border.
Delete — Click this button to delete the selected border from the list.
Border symbol for The current border symbol for the first sheet is specified after this field
first sheet such as Borders: asheet.1
Click the Change button to specify a different border symbol for the first
sheet. Changes are stored in the Borders Symbols file that you specified in
the Setup > Settings menu item, Project category, Borders Symbols
field.
Border symbol for The current border symbol for the next sheet is specified after this field
next sheet such as Borders: asheet.1
Click the Change button to specify a different border symbol for the next
sheet. Changes are stored in the Borders Symbols file that you specified in
the Setup > Settings menu item, Project category, Borders Symbols
field.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones
Table 2-73. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Border Properties Click this button to bring up the Borders Properties dialog box. From this
button dialog box, you can view any properties currently associated with the
selected border symbol.
Clear Border Click this button to clear the border symbol association from the selected
Symbols button border type as shown in the following example:
Horizontal Zones Use the following settings to control the horizontal zones of the
schematic:
• Letters (A, B, C,...) - If selected, letters are used to denote the
horizontal zones
• Numbers (1,2,3,...) - If selected, numbers are used to denote the
horizontal zones
Descending - If checked, the letters or numbers start at the upper limit
on the left side, and decrease as they move to the right
• Number of Zones - Specify the number of horizontal zones
• Offset - Specify the horizontal offsets, both Top and Bottom (the units
specified in Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), are used)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones
Table 2-73. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Vertical Zones Use the following settings to control the vertical zones of the schematic:
• Letters (A, B, C,...) - If selected, letters are used to denote the vertical
zones
• Numbers (1,2,3,...) - If selected, numbers are used to denote the
horizontal zones
Descending - If checked, the letters or numbers start at the upper limit
on the lower side, and decrease as they move up
• Number of Zones - Specify the number of vertical zones
• Offset - Specify the vertical offsets, both Left and Right (the units
specified in Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), are used)
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Controlling Sheet Borders [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Setting Zones to Match an Existing Border Symbol [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference
Objects
Table 2-74. Settings - Project - Cross Reference Option
Option Description
Annotation Format for Use the dropdown list to access the cross-reference variables:
Links $sheet, $hzone, $vzone, $sheet_number, and $block. Using these
variables or a combination of text and these variables, you can
configure the cross reference annotation as desired.
Example: A setting of $(sheet)-$(vzone)$(hzone)-$(block)
produces the following:
Annotation Origin Use the dropdown list to choose the origin point (or none) for the
placement of the annotation text as one of the following:
• None
• Upper left
• Middle left
• Lower left
• Upper center
• Middle center (This is used in previous example)
• Lower center
• Upper right
• Middle right
• Lower right
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference
Related Topics
Linking and Embedding Objects [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Partitioning a Sheet Into Zones [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter
Objects
Table 2-75. Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter Contents
Field Description
Net Name Delimiter Select one of the following net name delimiters:
• None “ ”
• Round Brackets “()”
• Square Brackets “[]”
Related Topics
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Databook
Objects
Table 2-76. Settings Dialog Box - Databook Contents
Field Description
DataBookconfiguration Specify the configuration file location for DataBook. If you do
not include a full path to the configuration file, but only include
the filename, The Databook tool searches for the file first in the
project directory, and then in the WDIR directories from left to
right.
Related Topics
Creating a Databook Configuration Files [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering
Tip
Whenever you change the Sheet Numbering setting, the Navigator is dynamically updated.
The print and PDF generation process reflects the numbers shown in the Navigator.
However, before a sheet numbering change takes place in the border property
@PRINTORDER, you must first update the numbering with Tools > Update Other
Objects > Page numbers. Also, if you close and reopen PADS Designer, the @PRINTORDER
property on each Border is automatically updated.
Objects
Table 2-77. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering Contents
Field Description
Numbering Schemes
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering
Vertical If selected, the block order for printing is set to Vertical as shown in the
example in the following diagram:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL
The Export HDL settings are further set with the following Settings dialog box panes:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL
Objects
Table 2-79. Settings - Project - Export HDL - VHDL - General Contents
Field Description
Log File Specify the output log file from the VHDL netlist operation
Global Signals Specify the package name where the global signals are placed
Down To Generate entities down to specified Level property
Use VHDL-93 Naming If checked, use VHDL-93 extended identifiers in component, pin
Conventions and generic names
Generate Only 1-Bit Wide If checked, generate only 1-Bit wide nets, pins, and ports.
Nets, Pins and Ports
Generate Multiple Netlists, If checked, the netlister placed each entity in a separate file. In
One For Each Entity such cases the field “Output File” changes to “Output Folder”
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL
Table 2-79. Settings - Project - Export HDL - VHDL - General Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Do not create parameters If checked, disables generation of component generics.
for corresponding
component attributes
Automatic empty model If checked, creates empty models for all “not bound” primitives.
creation
Suppress Messages If checked, suppress messages in the output log.
Related Topics
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Objects
Table 2-80. Settings - Project - Export HDL - Verilog - General Contents
Field Description
Log File Specify the output log file from the Verilog netlist operation
Global Signals Specify the module name where the global signals are placed
Timescale Enter the Time Unit/Time Precision into the Timescale field to
specify an alternate timescale for the Verilog netlist. The default
timescale is 1ns/1ns.
Down To Generate modules down to specified Level property as one or more
of STD, VHDL, or Verilog
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Table 2-80. Settings - Project - Export HDL - Verilog - General Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Properties to Parameters Set one of the following choices to limit which PADS Designer
component properties are converted to corresponding Verilog
parameters:
• None - If checked, no Verilog parameters are created
• All - If checked, all component properties appear as Verilog
parameters
• Selected - If checked, only the properties specified in the
Selected list will be converted to corresponding Verilog
parameters. You separate multiple properties in the list with
spaces. If a property name has a space in it, quote it with either
single or double quotes, such as: “Part Number” or ‘Part
Number’.
Generate Only 1-Bit Wide If checked, generate only 1-bit wide nets, pins and ports.
Nets, Pins and Ports
Generate Multiple Netlists, If checked, the netlister places each module in a separate file. In
One For Each Entity such cases the field “Output File” changes to “Output Folder”
Automatic empty model If checked, creates empty models for all “not bound” primitives.
creation
Suppress Messages If checked, suppress messages in the output log.
Related Topics
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor
Objects
Table 2-81. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor Contents
Option Description
Schematic Units
Unit Set the PADS Designer unit of measurement as one of the following
settings from the dropdown list:
• Millimeters
• Centimeters
• Inches
Once set, PADS Designer uses the unit of measurement you have chosen
for measurements such as Default Sheet Size, New Sheets, or Grid
Spacing.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor
Related Topics
Setting the Schematic Grid Pattern [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan, and Zoom
Objects
Table 2-82. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Strokes, Pan, and Zoom
Contents
Fields Description
Pan and Zoom Sets the PADS Designer schematic window to pan and zoom in the style of
one of the following tools:
• Default Pan and Zoom — PADS Designer
• PADS Pan and Zoom — PADS layout tool
See also “Pan and Zoom Within Schematics” in the PADS Schematic Design
User’s Guide.
Strokes Either turns off strokes, which are predefined patterns of mouse movements
to execute commands or functions, or selects the mouse button you use to
draw the strokes in the schematic window. Choose one of the following:
• Strokes off — turns off strokes
• Right Button — Use right mouse button to execute stroke commands
• Middle Button — Use middle mouse button to execute stroke commands
See also “Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes” on page 427.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan, and Zoom
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets
Objects
Table 2-83. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets Contents
Fields Description
Default Sheet Size
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets
Table 2-83. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets Contents
Fields Description
Size Sets the default sheet size and orientation (Portrait or Landscape) for all
new schematics and symbols.
Specify one of the following sizes, specified in Landscape order as:
<width> x <height> (The setting determines the number value applied):
• A - 11” (297.4mm) x 8.5” (215.9mm)
• B - 17” (431.8mm) x 11” (279.4mm)
• C - 22” (558.8mm) x 17” (431.8mm)
• D - 34” (863.6mm) x 22” (558.8mm)
• E - 44” (1117.6mm) x 34” (863.6mm)
• A4 - 297mm (11.69”) x 210mm (8.26”)
• A3 - 420mm (16.53”) x 297mm (11.69”)
• A2 - 594mm (23.38”) x 420mm (16.53”)
• A1 - 841mm (33.11”) x 594mm (23.38”)
• A0 - 1189mm (46.81”) x 841mm (33.11”)
• Custom - user-definable width and height
If you select Custom as the sheet size, you specify the width and height
settings.
Width Sets the sheet width. The width setting is set automatically unless you
specify Custom as the sheet size. If you change the width setting without
selecting Custom as the sheet size, the sheet size is automatically changed
to Custom.
Height Sets the sheet height. The height setting is set automatically unless you
specify Custom as the sheet size. If you change the height setting without
selecting Custom as the sheet size, the sheet size is automatically changed
to Custom.
Sheet Orientation Sets the sheet orientation as one of the following:
• Portrait
• Landscape
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets
Table 2-83. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets Contents
Fields Description
Border Sheet Sets the automatic sheet border placement on new schematics. A default
Options schematic sheet must exist. If it does not, you must create a new default
border sheet.
• Automatically add border to new schematic sheets: If checked, places a
hardwired border schematic from a required location on to new
schematics.
• Enable user-configurable border symbols: If checked, places a user-
configured border symbol on to new schematics. This symbol can be
from any location in the search order
• Use sheet 1 border for underlying schematics: Lets you choose to use
either the same user-configurable border for all sheets, or a different
border for the first sheet in a design.
Rules:
a. This setting has no effect on a top level schematic. You use this
setting to specify which border to use on the first sheet of a new
schematic when you push into a composite component.
b. If you select this setting, the border specified in Border for Sheet 1 is
used on the first sheet of the underlying schematic.
c. If you clear this setting, the border specified in Border for Sheet 2-N
is used for all sheets, including sheet 1.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Text
Objects
Table 2-84. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Settings - Text Contents
Field Description
Default Text Origin Sets the default origin point for all new text, labels, and properties you
create. Valid options are:
• Lower Center
• Lower Left
• Lower Right
• Middle Center. Default.
• Middle Left
• Middle Right
• Upper Center
• Upper Left
• Upper Right
Default Text Size Sets text size for all new text, labels, and properties you create.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Nets
Objects
Table 2-85. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Nets Contents
Field Description
Avoidance When Avoidance Routing (see below) is active, sets the minimum
Distance distance between nets and components or other nets (avoidance distance).
Net Length Set the length of a net stub of parts you place from PADS Databook,
which uses the “Add Component With Net Stubs” option.
Snap Nets To Pin If checked, snaps nets to the nearest pin of a specified component.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Nets
Table 2-85. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Nets Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Route Mode Specifies the routing mode for new connections as one of the following:
• Straight
Straight routing specifies a straight connection between two points.
This “as is” form of routing can overlap or pass through components
and existing connections. Any incidental crossing of nets from straight
routing does not imply a connection, and does not create a solder dot.
• Orthogonal
Orthogonal routing begins with a horizontal or vertical orientation
depending on the point of origin as follows:
• From a joint — begins in a horizontal or vertical direction following
the cursor movement (left or right, horizontal — up or down,
vertical)
• From a pin — automatically begins in a horizontal or vertical
direction, depending on the orientation of the pin
• From a point on a net or bus segment — begins in a direction
perpendicular to the orientation of the segment
• Avoidance
Avoidance routing specifies an automatic connection between two
points that avoids components. Specifying intermediary points along
the connection creates a more distinct specification of the path of the
connection.
The distance between components and the connection is the avoidance
distance. The PADS Designer tool automatically staggers a connection
by the avoidance distance as the route hugs to the components or other
connections.
See also “Setting Net and Bus Preferences” in the PADS Schematic
Design User’s Guide.
Name New Nets If checked, the schematic capture tool automatically names nets based on
Automatically the rules described in the topic:
See also “Naming Connectivity Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design
User’s Guide.
Name New Buses If checked, the schematic capture tool automatically names buses based on
Automatically the rules described in the topics:
“Naming Connectivity Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s
Guide.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters
Objects
Table 2-86. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Selection Filters Contents
Field Description
Custom filter Displays the names of the predefined and custom filters.
All Enables the selection of all objects.
Graphics Enables the selection of lines, arcs, boxes, and circles.
None Disables the selection of all objects.
Objects Enables the selection of boards, borders, groups, nets and buses, pins,
rippers, symbols, and wires and wire buses.
Text Enables the selection of text attached to names, properties, and text.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters
Table 2-86. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Selection Filters Contents
Field Description
Add Enables you to create a new custom filter name, and then select the desired
selection filters using the New Selection Filter dialog box.
Remove Deletes the currently selected custom filter.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
Creating and Using Selection Filters [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor
Objects
Field Description
Pins:
Default length Set the default length of new symbol pins (in grid points) by
changing the existing number or clicking either the up or down
arrow to increment/decrement the number.
Default spacing Set the default spacing between new symbol pins (in grid points)
by changing the existing number or clicking either the up or
down arrow to increment/decrement the number.
Properties:
Automatic pin side If checked, the symbol editor dynamically changes the pin
recognition orientation and applies a pin type and side definition in the Pins
window when you place a pin on a symbol.
Pin property position Set the pin property position using the dropdown list as either
Below Pin or Above Pin.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor
Field Description
Symbol property position Set the symbol property position using the dropdown list as
either Below Symbol or Above Symbol.
Name visibility Set the name visibility using the dropdown list as either:
• Never show
• Show hidden properties
• Show placeholder
Symbol file format:
Use high precision If checked, the ASCII symbol file format uses point coordinates
and font sizes with a 1/100000 mm precision. This is required if
you are using metric symbols.
If unchecked, the symbol file format is compatible with
EXP2005.x or earlier software that used a 1/100 inch precision.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties
Figure 2-72. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties
Objects
Table 2-87. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties
Contents
Field Description
Move Up / Move Down — Moves selected entry up or down one level in
the list.
Delete — Removes a highlighted property entry from the list. If no
properties are highlighted, Delete removes properties them from the list,
from the bottom row to the top row.
Name Displays a dropdown list of central library properties.
Value Enter a value for the selected property.
You can enter real numbers, integers, or alphanumeric characters.
Note: Refer to Property Definition Editor for the property settings for
each property.
Position Defines the positioning of the visible property or symbol item (line, pin).
• Below Symbol — Assigns the label position underneath the left side of
the last added property, or symbol item.
• Above Symbol — Assigns the label position above the left side of the
last added property, or symbol item.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties
Description
This dialog box enables you to configure symbols created by the Symbol Editor to add or
remove default pin properties, assign a default value to all assigned pin properties, and control
the visibility and label position of each property. When assigning a default list of properties, sort
properties in the list to control the order of appearance.
Figure 2-73. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties
Objects
Table 2-88. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties
Contents
Field Description
Move Up / Move Down — Moves selected entry up or down one level in
the list.
Delete — Removes a highlighted property entry from the list. If no
properties are highlighted, Delete removes properties them from the list,
from the bottom row to the top row.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties
Table 2-88. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Name Displays a dropdown list of central library properties.
Value Enter a value for the selected property.
You can enter real numbers, integers, or alphanumeric characters.
Note: Refer to Property Definition Editor for the property settings for
each property.
Position Defines the positioning of the visible property or symbol item (line, pin).
• Above Pin — Assigns the label position above the pin.
• Below — Assigns the label position below the pin.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties
Objects
Table 2-89. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties
Contents
Field Description
Delete — Removes a highlighted property entry from the list. If no
properties are highlighted, Delete removes properties them from the list,
from the bottom row to the top row.
Name Displays a dropdown list of central library HLA properties.
Value Enter a value for the selected property.
You can enter real numbers, integers, or alphanumeric characters.
Note: Refer to Property Definition Editor for the property settings for
each property.
Position Defines the positioning of the visible property or symbol item (line, pin).
• Above Symbol — Assigns the label position above the symbol.
• Below Symbol — Assigns the label position below the symbol.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Graphical Rules Checker
Use this dialog box to choose which rules to run with the Graphical Rules Checker (GRC).
Objects
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table
Objects
Table 2-90. Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table Contents
Field Description
Symbol label Select how you want the Symbol label(s) to appear in the Interconnectivity
format Table using one of the formats in the expandable list. You can include
formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon
and so on.
Show These two radio buttons toggle the components display configuration between
components the following:
in... • Show components in columns, nets in rows
• Show components in rows, nets in columns
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice
Objects
Table 2-91. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice Contents
Field Description
Nets Choose how to slice and dice ICT nets as one of the following:
• Show only nets connected between the components of Slice and Dice
• Show nets connected between and to the components of Slice and Dice
• Show all nets
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties
Objects
Table 2-92. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties Contents
Field Description
Property Displays a list of available properties.
Visible If checked, specify which properties you want to be visible.
Buttons
Load Scheme Displays the Load Properties Scheme dialog box, which enables you to search
for, select, and load an XML-formatted file (*.p4i) that contains a saved
configuration of which properties you want to be visible.
Save Scheme Displays the Save Properties Scheme dialog box, which enables you to save the
current configuration of which properties are visible to a *.p4i file.
Uncheck all If unchecked, marks all the listed properties as hidden
Check all If checked, marks all the listed properties as visible
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks
Objects
Table 2-93. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks Contents
Field Description
Hierarchical or Controls how PADS Designer displays blocks in the Navigator as one of the
Flatten view following:
• Hierarchical view —
Each branch of the design hierarchy is represented by an instance of a
block. Leaf cells and child blocks, appear in the Symbols folder below the
parent.
• Flatten view —
Intermediate branches of the design hierarchy are collapsed. Only leaf
cells appear in the Symbols folder below the related sheet.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks
Label format Use this field to set the block label format in the Navigator window using any
combination of the following variables available from the dropdown list:
• $(Name)
• $(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.
Info Tip format Use this field to set the block info tip format (shown in the previous figure for
Label format) in the Navigator window using any combination of the
following variables available from the dropdown list:
• $(Name)
• $(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets
Objects
Table 2-94. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets Contents
Field Description
Display sheets Depending on which selection you choose as shown at the bottom of the
following figure, this option displays icons for each sheet and composite
node within a design in the Navigator tree.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets
Related Topics
Changing Sheet Print Order [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbols
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbols
Objects
Table 2-95. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Symbols Contents
Field Description
Display ... Sets how the Navigator displays symbols as one of the following:
• Display all components — The Navigator tree displays all symbol
components as follows:
• Don’t display components — The Navigator tree does not show any
symbol components as follows:
Label format Selects how Symbol label(s) appears in the Navigator tree list using one of
the formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Label format: $(Name) ($(Symbol))
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:
Info Tip format: Selects how Information Tip (the textbox that appears when you mouse-
over a list item) appears in the Navigator tree list using one of the formats
in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Info Tip format: $(Type): $(Path)/$(Name)
($(Symbol)
Results with a Navigator Info Tip box appearance of:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses
Objects
Table 2-96. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses Contents
Field Description
Display nets and If checked, display nets and buses in the Navigator tree.
buses
Net label format: Selects how net label(s) appear in the Navigator tree list using one of the
formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Net label format: $(Name)
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses
Table 2-96. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Net info Tip Selects how net info Tip appears in the Navigator tree list using one of the
format: formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Net label format: $(Type): $(Path)/$(Name)
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:
Bus label format: Selects how bus label(s) appear in the Navigator tree list using one of the
formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Bus label format: $(Name)
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:
Bus info Tip Selects how bus info Tip appears in the Navigator tree list using one of the
format: formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Bus label format: $(Type): $(Path)/$(Name)
Results in a Navigator appearance as follows:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
DxDesigner.xml File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Objects
Table 2-97. Settings Dialog Box - Objects Contents
Field Description
Objects Table Defines the characteristics of either schematic or ICT objects.
• Gray cells — unavailable.
• Active cells — Choose the desired characteristic from the
dropdown list or type in a value. The Width column values
range from 1 (thin) to 10 (widest).
Schematic Selected, enables you to set the characteristics of schematic objects.
ICT Selected, enables you to set the characteristics of ICT objects.
Load Scheme Loads pre-saved object settings from a *.dxc file.
Save Scheme Saves the existing object settings in a *.dxc file.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
Objects
Table 2-98. Settings Dialog Box - Display - Font Styles Contents
Field Description
Style Choose the font style from the list of available fonts. The remainder of the
Font Styles options configure the selected style. Any text on the schematic
that has a property of Font set to a particular style is now easily
customized. For example, if you customize the Fixed font style with the
available settings described in the following table rows, any Font property
that you set to Fixed changes accordingly.
Add new style Press this button to create a new style, which you enter in the “New style”
button dialog box.
Delete style button Press this button to delete the selected, custom style from the Style list.
Scale factor Use this option to provide a scale factor for the selected Style that is
applied to the Size property value that appears on all text objects.
Font Choose the font face from the dropdown list to configure the selected
Style.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
Table 2-98. Settings Dialog Box - Display - Font Styles Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Charset If the font you chose for the selected Style has multiple character sets,
choose the desired set from the dropdown list.
Bold, Italic, Select any of these checkboxes to apply the characteristic to the selected
Strikeout, style.
Underline
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Diagnostics
Objects
Table 2-99. Settings Dialog Box -Diagnostics Contents
Field Description
Execute Diagnostics If checked, the schematic capture tool runs the automatic Diagnostics
on exit utility when the session exits.
Related Topics
Checking Data Integrity With the Diagnostics Tools, and Correcting Reported Errors [PADS
Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing
Objects
Table 2-100. Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing Contents
Field Description
Limit selection to already If checked, only the open schematic sheets or open ICTs cross
open documents probe to other applications, such as PADS Layout.
If checked, you can further control cross probing to any of the
following selected objects:
• for Signal Nets — If checked, enables cross probing for signal
nets on open documents.
• for Global Nets — If checked, enables cross probing for signal
nets on open documents.
• for Components — If checked, enables cross probing for
components on open documents.
• for Pins — If checked, enables cross probing for pins on open
documents.
Zoom Fit to Selected If checked, the PADS Designer tool zooms in on the selected,
objects cross-probed object. This setting also works with dynamic links, to
zoom in on the target object when a link is traversed.
Highlight unplaced components
Enable If checked, cross probing highlights unplaced components.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing
Related Topics
Cross Probing Between the Design Entry Tool and Other Tools [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup
Objects
Table 2-101. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup Contents
Field Description
Create Automatic Sheet/ If checked, both sheets and ICTs are backed up each time you open
ICT Backup them. Use the “Number of backups” dropdown list (between 4 and
20) to set the number of sheet/ICT backups to save before
overwriting them. If you keep the default of 0, the PADS Designer
tool saves backups without overwriting older ones.
Warn before deleting all If checked, provides a warning before deleting all backups of the
sheet backups current sheet.
Warn before deleting If checked, provides a warning before deleting all sheet backups in
current board backups the current board.
Warn before deleting If checked, provides a warning before deleting all sheet backups in
project backups the current project.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup
The Project Backup dialog box shows the settings for the available backup types. The backup
types and the controls of the dialog box are described in the following tables.
Each backup type is further grouped under three categories: system, upgrade, or user. The
System Administrator can set permissions for which category a client can change settings. For
more information on setting Backup settings permissions, see the descriptions for
SystemBackupsSettings, UpgradeBackupsSettings, and UserBackupsSettings in the topic
“ProjectBackup.cfg Configuration File” in the Concurrent Design Administrators Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup
Objects
Table 2-102. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup Types
Backup Type Category Description
AutoSave User Created every <Interval> if the content has changed
since the last AutoSave made by the current server
session.
Session Startup User Created on server session startup, before the database is
opened.
Session Shutdown User Created on server session shutdown, after the database
is closed.
Application User Compatibility replacement for AutoBackup
functionality. Triggered by applications in specific
situations (e.g. project close, save, etc.). The interval
<Interval> defines the minimum time period between
successive backups.
Diagnostics System Created before repairing the design with
PADS Designer Diagnostics.
CES Diagnostics System Created before repairing the design with Constraint
Manager Diagnostics
Database Upgrade Upgrade Created before iCDB database upgrade. The number of
backups to store is per software release version.
Clear All Constraints System Created before using “Clear All Constraints” in
Constraint Manager.
Update Reuse Block System Created before updating each Reuse Block in
PADS Designer.
Symbol Update System Created before each symbol update in the
PADS Designer tool.
Symbol Substitute System Created before each symbol substitution in the
PADS Designer tool.
Constraints Definitions Upgrade Created before constraint definition upgrade.
Upgrade
I/O Designer System Created before schematic changes made by I/O
Schematic Changes Designer.
User User Created when you select this option.
Archiver User Created by Archiver. See “Project Archive” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator
Objects
Table 2-104. Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator Contents
Field Description
ModelSim Executable Enter the path to the ModelSim®folder that contains the executable (or
Path browse to it).
Actions Before Simulation Initialization
Export HDL Files If checked, you do not need to run Simulation > Export HDL Files
( ) manually before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
Delete Design Units If checked, you do not need to run Simulation > Clean ( ) manually
from HDL Design before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
Compile Files If checked, you do not need to run Simulation > Compile ( )
manually before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator
Related Topics
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools
Objects
Table 2-105. Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools Contents
Field Description
Current Tool Choose which tool you want to execute (Xilinx or Altera) when you
click the Launch FPGA Tool button on the HDL/FPGA
Integration toolbar.
Overwrite Tools Files If checked, prepares the project file in the FPGA tool with the HDL
List file list when you click the Launch FPGA Tool button.
Export Before Launch If checked, exports HDL files when you run the Launch FPGA Tool.
Xilinx Executable Path Enter the path to the Xilinx folder that contains the executable (or
browse to it).
Altera Executable Path Enter the path to the Altera folder that contains the executable (or
browse to it).
Related Topics
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Run on Startup
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Databook Data Source
Objects
Table 2-107. Settings Dialog Box - DataBook Data Source Contents
Field Description
Save user If checked, the user name and password you provide below will be encrypted
name and and saved to the /<WDIR>/DxDesigner.xml file.
password
Data source Use the dropdown list to select the available data sources that have been
configured for your project. See “Creating a Databook Configuration File” in
the PADS Schematic Design Administrator’s Guide
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Databook Data Source
Table 2-107. Settings Dialog Box - DataBook Data Source Contents (cont.)
Field Description
User name Only active if you checked the “Save user name and password” checkbox.
Note: If you do not set a user name and password, the Databook tool
prompts you for a user name and password when you try to open a
configuration file to a password-protected data source.
Password Only active if you checked the “Save user name and password” checkbox. See
the Note in the previous “User name” description.
Note: You cannot re-set the password through the dialog box. To re-set the
password, in the /<WDIR>/DxDesigner.xml file, delete the XML code
between the <USERDATA>...</USERDATA> tags.
Connection Displays the connection type.
type
Alias Displays the alias for the database.
Server Displays the server name if one is assigned.
Database Displays the Database name.
Related Topics
Databook to Data Sources Connections [PADS Schematic Design Administrator's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Licensing
Related Topics
Enabling Licensed Features [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Objects
Table 2-108. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents
Field Description
Alternative If unchecked, displays the default net connection dot.
four way net If checked, displays the alternative four-way net connection as shown:
connection
Area Select If checked, when you draw a box to select objects on a sheet, the objects do not
by Overlap need to be totally enclosed in the box to be selected. Even if just a portion of an
object is inside the selection box, the object is selected.
If unchecked, an object must be totally enclosed by the selection box to be
included in a selection.
For more information, see the following:
“Selecting Schematic Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Auto Pan If checked, automatically pans the screen when dragging a component around.
This eliminates the need to use F6 to pan each time you move an object.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
If unchecked, the design entry tool displays the schematic name followed by the
sheet name on schematic tabs as follows:
Display Controls how bus pin numbers on the design display when a bus is connected to
shortened Pin more than ten pins (represented as bus pins).
Numbers If unchecked, all bus pin numbers in the sequence display as shown here:
If checked, the bus pin numbers display in shortened form using an ellipsis as
shown here:
Note: When you check or uncheck this option, the tool updates the display
of all bus pin numbers currently on the schematic as well as the bus pin
numbers of any new bus pins you subsequently add.
For more information, see the following:
“Connectivity With Buses” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Note: If you change the setting from checked (on) to unchecked (off) after
you have added text, any text appearing in the 180 degree state or the 270
degree state (as shown on the left in the example above) changes to the
equivalent state as shown at the right in the example when you apply the new
setting.
For more information, see the following:
“Changing Object Orientation” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Flag out-of- If checked, enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date managed blocks.
date Managed The software compares the managed block in the host design and central library
Blocks to ensure they are the same. If the time/date stamp of the managed block symbol
is different from that in the host design, the design entry tool places a magenta
box around the out-of-date managed block.
Flag out-of- If checked, enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date symbols. The
date symbols software compares the symbol in the host design and central library to ensure
they are the same. If the time/date stamp of the symbol is different from that in
the host design, the design entry tool places a magenta box around the out-of-
date symbol.
For more information, see the following:
“Updating a Project With Changed Library Content” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
If unchecked, PADS Designer just displays the bus ripper index value when you
rip nets from a bus as shown below:
Note: The option must be set before you can display the signal name.
For more information, see the following:
“Connectivity With Buses” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
Xpedition If checked, the design entry tool uses Xpedition Layout-style key bindings.
Style Key If unchecked, the design entry tool uses default key bindings.
bindings
For more information, see “Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes” on
page 427.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced
BI Solid
IN Solid
OEM Hollow
OUT Solid
TRI Hollow
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Simulation Setup Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-110. Simulation Setup Dialog Box - SDF Tab Contents
Field Description
Files In this list, add one or more standard delay format (SDF) files,
which describe various interconnect delays to run back-annotated
simulations.
Disable SDF Warnings If checked, set the simulator to disable these warning reports.
Reduce SDF Error To If checked, set the simulator to reduce the severity of error found
Warnings to warnings.
Multi-Source Delay From the dropdown list, set to one of the following: latest, min,
or max. Or leave blank for none.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Update Other Objects Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-111. Update Other Object Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Type (select one or more of these types to update)
Properties See also “Controlling Sheet Borders” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Bus Signals See also “Creating and Editing Predefined Buses” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Bus Rippers See also “Using a Customized Ripper Graphic” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Print Order If you select a sheet from the Navigator and apply the “Exclude
from Printout” option (right-click Exclude from Printout popup
menu item), you must update the associated Border property
@PRINTORDER using this Print Order option.
See also “Excluding Sheets From Printing or PDF Generation”
and “Changing Sheet Print Order” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Update Other Objects Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box
• From the Navigator, right-click a board design, and choose Verify popup menu item.
Use this dialog box to configure the Verify tool.
Description
The left column of the Verify dialog box (shown in Figure 2-98) provides access to the Settings
pane, and to the design rule check (DRC) groups.
You use the Settings pane in the Verify dialog box (shown in Figure 2-99) to configure the DRC
scope and to see which Defaults file and which Configuration file the Verify tool uses. See the
remaining tables in this topic for more information on this pane.
You can click on any of the DRC groups and see the individual DRCs for that group displayed
in the pane on the right side of the dialog box. See “DRC Groups” on page 477 for detailed
information on these design rule checks. You can also refer to “Design Objects” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guidefor a description of the design hierarchy.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box
Objects
Table 2-112. Verify Settings Pane Contents - PADS Designer
Field Description
Board If chosen, the Verify tool checks the selected board.
PADS
Integrated or
Netlist project
Schematic If chosen, the Verify tool checks the schematic of this block or design.
Sheet If chosen, the Verify tool checks the first sheet of this block or design.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box
Related Topics
DRC Groups
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Migration Rules Group
Connectivity Rules Group
Hierarchy Rules Group
Integrity Rules Group
Power & Ground Rules Group
Device Specific Rules Group
HDL Checks Rules Group
Links Rules Group
Verify Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Pane
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Pane
Use this dialog box pane to configure compatibility checking in the Design Rule Checker
(DRC) Verify tool for component pin types connected to system signals across multiple boards
in a design.
Description
The Verify dialog box, Interconnectivity pane (shown in Figure 2-100) is a user-configurable
interface that enables you to specify which connections you want checked based on object type,
and how you want the specified connections handled by the DRC Verify tool. You click on each
icon in the grid to toggle between the four checking options.
You can refer to “Design Objects” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide for a more
detailed description of design objects.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Pane
Objects
You configure compatibility checking between two types of objects by locating one type of
object on the X axis, locating the other type of object on the Y axis, and clicking where they
intersect to toggle the icon between the checking options described in the following table.
In the PADS Designer tool, the Interconnectivity pane displays additional checkbox options as
shown in Figure 2-100. If you check the checkbox at the intersection of two pin types, the tool
also verifies the validity of the connection between the two pin types of active components.
Table 2-113. Verify Settings - Interconnectivity Grid Options
Field Description
Ignore Connection Specifies that the tool will not report a connection it identifies
between the two object types specified on the X and Y axis of the
Interconnectivity Grid, and will not flag it as a warning or error.
Report Connection Specifies that the tool will report all the connections it identifies
between the two object types specified on the X and Y axis of the
Interconnectivity Grid.
Generate a Warning Specifies that the tool will generate a warning when it identifies a
connection between the two object types specified on the X and
Y axis of the Interconnectivity Grid.
Generate an Error Specifies that the tool will generate an error when it identifies a
connection between the two object types specified on the X and
Y axis of the Interconnectivity Grid.
Related Topics
DRC Groups
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Verify Dialog Box
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box
If state, flowchart, or table blocks exist in the design, the appropriate HDL Generator is run on
the blocks to generate a Verilog netlist (.v). All settings are stored in an hdlutils.ini file that the
Verilog netlister creates in the project directory.
Objects
Table 2-114. Verilog Netlister Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Output File Specify the output file of the resulting Verilog netlist
From Block You can enter a specific schematic name or leave this field empty
to generate Verilog files for all schematics in the design
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box
Description
You set up the netlister from Setup > Settings, Project category, Export HDL(subcategory,
VHDL subcategory.
The VHDL Netlister produces an ASCII output file with a .vhd extension in the Generated HDL
directory specified in the project. Any existing .vhd file with the same base name is overwritten.
Objects
Table 2-115. VHDL Netlister Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Output Folder Specify the output folder/file of the resulting VHDL netlist
From Block You can enter a specific schematic name or leave this field empty
to generate VHDL files for all the schematics in the design
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed
Example VHDL Netlist Output File
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Dialog Boxes and Windows
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Chapter 3
Design Entry Tool Commands
You can execute design entry tool commands from the user interface using the command line
toolbar or keybindings and strokes. Also, you can execute some shell-level commands from the
Windows command prompt without invoking the design entry tool.
Design Entry Tool Key Bindings and Strokes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Tip
You can view your predefined key bindings by choosing the Help > Show Bindings menu
item.
A new schematic window appears containing the key binding definitions. A list of stroke
bindings display at the bottom of the window list as a sequence of numbers to reflect the stroke
grid. For more information, see the table in “Key Bindings and Strokes” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Tip
You can view your predefined stroke definitions graphically by toggling on the
Help > Show Strokes menu setting.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary
• Default Pan and Zoom — The tool accesses the predefined settings from:
\<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\vdbindings.vbs
• Xpedition Pan and Zoom — The tool accesses the predefined settings from:
\<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\exped_wvo.vbs
• PADS Pan and Zoom — The tool accesses the predefined settings from:
\<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\vdbindings.vbs
DxArchiver In the PADS Designer tool, the Archiver utility collects and stores
(-h) schematics, symbols, and other data associated with a specific design
or project in the design entry tool.
See also “Project Archive” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
edifExporter Export an EDIF netlist.
(-h)
icdbPartsLister Configure the Part Lister tool for creating a list of the parts used in a
(-h) design.
For more information, see the following:
“Generating Bills of Materials” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide
“icdbPartsLister” on page 431
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
icdbPartsLister
icdbPartsLister
You invoke the Part Lister from the command line.
Usage
icdbPartsLister [-p | -proj]=file.prj [-b | -board]=name
[-s | -block]=name [-a | -architecture]=name
[-c | -cfg]=file.ipl [-o | -out]=file
[-l | -level]=level
Arguments
• -p or -proj=<file>.prj
Specify the path to the <file>.prj project file
• -b or -board=name
If you do not want to run the Part Lister on the entire project, specify the specific board
(name) or optionally choose a block as shown in the next argument.
• -s or -block=name
If you do not want to run the Part Lister on the entire project or a specific board, specify a
block (name).
• -a or -architecture=name
Use this option to choose a specific VHDL architecture (name).
• -f or -function=name
Use this option to choose a specific function.
• -c or -cfg=file.ipl
Choose a <file>.ipl file that contains the Part Lister options.
• -o or -out=file
Specify the output file path.
• -l or -level=level
Specify a custom level.
Examples
If your design is called circuit1, you could invoke the Part Lister with this command:
However, since the name of the initialization and output files are arbitrary, you may create
several different initialization files to produce various output files, such as separate parts lists
and cost summaries. If you wanted to generate cost summaries for several different designs, you
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
icdbPartsLister
might have an initialization file for this purpose, so you could invoke the Part Lister with this
command:
The Part Lister looks in your current project directory (by default) for the initialization (.ipl) file
you are calling out. If the Part Lister does not find the .ipl file in the current project, it then looks
in your “STANDARD” directory as defined in your WDIR environmental variable. If the Part
Lister still cannot find the .ipl file, it generates an error message indicating the problem.
Related Topics
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
package
package
Shell-level command
Configure and run the Packager, which prepares the specified project for forward annotation by
assigning reference designators to map each component in the logical schematic to a physical
part.
Usage
package -j<path_to_proj> [-n<design_name>] [-ob | -op] [-Block=<block_name>]
[-Add | -Refresh | -Replace | -CleanBuild] [-Update[=<file>]] [-u<directory>] [-p<file>]
[-b<file>] [-l<file>] [-d] [-i] [-a] [-NoFill] [-W1PinNets]
[-r] [-s] [-CW] [-y]
[-k] [-1 | -2] [-help]
Arguments
• -j <path_to_proj>
Required. Specify the path to the project file.
• -n <design_name>
Specify the design or configuration name.
• Packaging Optimization
If neither the -ob or -op options are used, symbols are combined into packages regardless of
the symbol’s location within the schematic. Or specify the Packaging Optimization as one
of the following:
-ob — Only allows symbols within the same block to be combined into packages.
-op — Only allows symbols on the same page to be combined into packages.
• -Block= <block_name>
Define the scope of the packaging operation. If you omit this option, the Packager works on
the entire design. If specify a block, the Packager narrows the scope to all sheets in that
block. If you specify a particular sheet from one of the blocks such as <schematic_name>1,
the Packager narrows the operation scope even further to just that sheet.
• -Add
Extract only those parts that do not already exist in the local copy. Does not check for newer
versions of local parts.
• -Refresh
Extract only those parts that do not already exist in the local copy. Overwrites existing local
parts with newer versions if they exist in the central library.
• -Replace
Delete local data and re-extracts. Exception: If you have imported any data directly into the
local copy (for example, an FPGA Pin File), that data is preserved.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
package
• -CleanBuild
Delete all local data and re-extracts.
• -Update[ =<file> ]
Specify a file that contains a list of parts that get updated during packaging. If no file is
specified, update all parts.
• -u<directory
Specify a Central Database.
• -p <file>
Specify the target Parts Database (cad.pdb).
• -b <file>
Specify the output BAM (db_wasis.BAM).
• -l <file>
Specify a file for the logfile output.
• -d
Write verbose information on the packaging process to a log file. To optimize performance,
enable this option to debug packager errors, and then disable once the design is error-free.
• Packaging Operation
If neither the -i, -r, or -s options are set, the Packager maintains any existing packaging. The
packager only packages new or unpackaged components. Otherwise, set the packaging
operation as one of the following:
-i — The Packager removes all the Frozen Package properties and packages all components,
including previously packaged components.
-r — Packages all components except those that have a Frozen Package property value of
Fix.
-s — Checks the design to verify that it will package correctly. Writes errors to the
partpkg.log file.
• -a
Prevents the Packager from replacing existing alphanumeric Reference Designators.
• -NoFill
If you do not specify this option, the Packager fills in Reference Designators (Ref Des)
when new unpackaged parts are added to the design. For example; Given U100, U102, and
U103... If a new part is added, it is assigned Reference Designator U101 to fill in the gap
between U100 and U102.
If you specify this -NoFill option, the Packager assigns Ref Des numbers to continue at the
top of the existing numbering scheme when new unpackaged parts are added to the design.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
package
For example; Given the parts in the previous example, if a new part is added, the gap
between U100 and U102 is retained and the new part is assigned Ref Des U104.
• -W1PinNets
The Packager includes warnings for this condition in the PartPkg.log file and on the
Packager results tab. If this option is not specified, warnings for this condition are
suppressed.
• CW
Close window on completion.
• -y
Update BAM files only. The Packager will not update the Central Database.
• -k
Select this option if you are getting component properties from the parts database (PDB),
and not from Databook.
• -1
Low level of debug output is sent to the standard output.
• -2
High level of debug output is sent to the standard output.
• -help
Display the package command argument usage to the command window.
Related Topics
Packager Dialog Box
Packaging a Design [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
DxArchiver
DxArchiver
Run this command from a command shell (DOS).
The DxArchiver export option exports the design entry tool project data files in a specified
location and format. The archive export process generates the manifest.xml file, which contains
the contents of the archive package.
Note
For more overview information on the Archiver, such as why you would use this tool, see
“Project Archive” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Usage
DxArchiver [−p file_name] [−t directory] [−c file_name] [−l log_file] [-zip] [-createpdf]
[−noGUI]
DxArchiver −h
Arguments
• -p file_name
(Optional) Specifies the path and name of the design entry tool project (.prj) file to archive.
• -t directory
(Optional) Specifies the target directory.
• -c file_name
(Optional) Specifies the path to the DxArchiver.xml file.
• -l log_file
(Optional) Creates a log file of the archive.
• -zip
(Optional) Compresses the contents and creates a single Zip format file (.zip) of the project
and related files.
• -createpdf
(Optional) Creates a PDF format file (.pdf) of all the schematic sheets in the project file.
• -noGUI
(Optional) Tells DxArchiver not to use the wizard.
• -h
Displays help.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
DxArchiver
Examples
• Display help for the DxArchiver command:
\<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\common\win32\bin\DxArchiver.exe
-h
• Archive the project with an additional folder and file specified in the DxArchiver.xml
file. Also, compress the contents of the archive into a single Zip format file and create a
PDF format file of the schematic sheets.
DxArchiver -noGUI -p C:\DxWDIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj
-c C:\project_archives\DxArchiver.xml -t C:\project_archives
-zip -createpdf
The contents of the DxArchiver.xml specify an additional folder and file to include into
the archive:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<DxArchiverProject version="1">
<AdditionalFiles>
<File Path="./IOPT"/>
<File Path="./AdditionalFiles\XCVR_top.v"/>
</AdditionalFiles>
</DxArchiverProject>
Related Topics
DxArchiver.xml File Format
Archiver Wizard
Project Archive [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
sch2pdf
sch2pdf
In addition to using the PDF Writer interface, you can also generate PDF files for schematics
from the DOS command line. The command line program is named sch2pdf.exe.
Usage
sch2pdf -project <project_file> [-eevm <filename>] [-a <output_filename>]
[-c <colorCode>] [-d] [-e] [-g* global_override] [-i <hyperlink>] [-l <level>]
[-o <order>] [-s] [-p] [-f] [-v] [-udx] [-u <font_name> ]
[-schematic <name>]
Parameters
Command line options are described in the following tables.
Table 3-2. Command Line Options for Generating a PDF File
Option Description
-a Overrides the default output filename of <design>.pdf
-c Refer to “Command Line Color Codes For Generating a PDF File” in the
following table for a list of color code options.
-d Disable compression
-e Use exclusion info
-eevm Path to variant manager <filename>
-f Displays a PDF file in Adobe Acrobat with a list of fonts supported on your
system
-i Interprets component property name <hyperlink> as potential URL
-l Property (<level>) to stop descending composite symbols (specifies multiple
levels separately)
-o Component property names (<order>) whose values override sheet order (use
with Scout)
-p Adds a pop-up menu on components
-project Path to the .prj project file
-s Starts the Adobe Acrobat viewer and displays the output file
-schematic Specify the name of only one particular schematic to be generated.
-udx Use PADS font mapping
-u Disable font mapping for a particular named font. Use strokes for the specified
font. The possible <font_name> values are: "all" "Fixed" "Roman" "Roman
Italic" "Roman Bold" "Roman Bold Italic" "Sans Serif" "Script" "Sans Serif Bold"
"Script Bold" "Gothic" "Old English" "Kanji" and "Plot".
-v Makes all hyperlinks visible in a PDF document
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
sch2pdf
Related Topics
Design Entry Tool Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
vdrc (Design Rule Checker)
Related Topics
Design Entry Tool Commands
Verify Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
A B C D E F G I L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Chapter 4
Property Characteristics
You use properties to create information that the design tool interprets when it packages the
design, creates a netlist, verifies the design, or forward annotates to layout.
You can add properties to:
• Bus or net segments • Schematics (unattached)
• Components • Symbol pins
• Component pins • Symbols (unattached)
Note
You cannot place user-defined properties on boxes, lines, arcs or circles.
You use the Property Definition Editor tool to define or edit user-defined properties in the
PADS Designer tool. Property definitions establish data type and syntax rules associated with
each property value, such as maximum length and allowable characters.
There are two property definition files, one for each project type.
The design tool predefines several properties. For information on a specific predefined property,
refer to the Properties Glossary.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Hierarchy
Property Hierarchy
The library tool supports a multi-level property hierarchy that enables the librarian to assign a
property, and optionally a property value, to a local symbol, a library object in the central
library or a symbol file associated with a distributed library where it is most meaningful.
Likewise, the design entry tool supports a multi-level property hierarchy that enables you to
assign a property, and optionally a property value, to a design object in the design at different
levels depending on whether you require property variations across replicated blocks.
Properties may be defined at multiple levels as shown in the following figures.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Hierarchy
For information about property definitions, see “System and User-Defined Property Definition”
and the “Property Definition Editor Dialog Box” in the PADS Library Tools User’s Guide.
If the same property exists at multiple levels in the property hierarchy, then precedence rules
determine what property value the design entry tool uses. Table 4-2 shows the property
precedence rules.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Hierarchy
For example, a librarian defines a Cost property on a part in the central library, specifies to place
the property on a schematic automatically when the schematic designer places the part symbol,
and specifies the property value as “1.25”. Next, you place the part symbol on a sheet. At this
point the tool adds the Cost property value of “1.25” at the block level. Later, you, change the
Cost property value to “1.33” on the sheet. The “1.33” value replaces the “1.25” value at the
block level because the new value exists in the context of a schematic block. The original “1.25”
value is retained at the part level.
If properties of central library change after a symbol or part is added to a design, then you can
resynchronize the schematic design by running the packager tool with the “Update PDB
Properties on the Schematic” option selected. See “Packaging a Design” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
For an example of varying instance values across reused schematic blocks, see “Design
Structure” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Visibility Options
Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Visibility Options
Visibility options for properties are controlled by check boxes in the Properties window.
You can make properties visible or invisible at the symbol and/or schematic level. If you are in
a symbol window and properties are visible, they are also visible on the schematic window. If
you specify properties visible on the symbol, you cannot make them invisible on the schematic.
Having the properties set as visible while you are placing them on the symbol is helpful.
However, as a general rule you should change the display of the property to invisible after you
have placed them on the schematic so they do not clutter the schematic drawing.
Note
Making a property invisible does not delete the property. It only helps to reduce the clutter
from the schematic display.
If you want the Ref Designator (REFDES) property to be invisible on the schematic, deselect
the Ref Designator check box (one for the property name and one for the property value) in the
Properties window.
Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Property Format
The format for properties is: NAME = VALUE You must specify the property name exactly as
you want the netlist to interpret it. For example, to associate reference designator information
with a symbol, add an property, such as REFDES=U?. REFDES is the property name and U? is
the property value.
There are several ways to define an property value:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Name and Value Restrictions
Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note
You cannot delete system properties. Simulation tools do not use user-defined properties.
Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating a User-Defined Property for a Netlist Project [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Netlist Interpretation of Properties
Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
User-Defined Properties
You can create any property to define unique information about your design such as optional
labels or part numbers used in the design.
The PADS Designer tool cannot interpret user-defined properties. The netlist process lists the
properties in the netlist file if you add them before the netlist is executed. You can interpret
user-defined properties for application specific functions using scripting or the PADS Designer
utilities.
Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Multiple Property Values
Most symbol properties are not accessible from the component level. You can add identical
properties to the component and change the property value on the component to override the
property value on the symbol. See “Multiple Property Values” on page 464.
Related Topics
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Related Topics
Property Characteristics
Multiple and Duplicate Properties
Design Object Properties [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Property Ranges
A property value can express a numerical range for a bus or a pin by specifying beginning,
ending, and incremental integer values. The design entry tool expands an property value with a
range to create a series of properties.
The format for property value ranges is:
NAME[F:L:I]
where F is the first number, L is the last number, and I is the interval between the numbers in the
range. If no interval is specified, the interval is 1.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Ranges
Separate the numbers with colons. You must enclose the range in brackets, and you can only
express the range in numeric characteristics.
In PCB design, multiple values of the property #=1,4,8,12, when attached to a symbol pin and
used in conjunction with a PARTS=4 property, indicate that this pin represents:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Property Characteristics
Property Ranges
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Chapter 5
Names
You can apply the same name to more than one bus.
You must name all pins on a block and you must name the ports of the underlying schematic to
correspond to the pins. The design entry tool uses these name matches to maintain connectivity
between a symbol and the underlying schematic.
You do not have to name symbols, but if you do, the name for each symbol must be unique to
avoid packager errors. You should not name module symbols, although naming composite
symbols (blocks) can make the design easier to read. You will receive packager errors if more
than one symbol has the same name. For more information on local symbols and their types,
refer to “Creating and Editing a Local Symbol” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Netlist type projects may use a dollar sign ($) in a block or schematic name.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Names
Unnamed Objects
On Windows platforms, block names and schematic names cannot be the same as names
reserved by Windows such as: COM(0-9), LPT(1-9), CON, PRN, AUX, NUL, and CLOCK$.
Note
You can detect if a block/symbol name has an invalid name format with the Verify tool,
Rule ID drc-004. See “Migration Rules Group” on page 496.
Sheet Names
It is recommended that you specify sheet names comprised of numerals (0-9), lowercase letters
(a-z), uppercase letters (A-Z), or underscore (_). Illegal characters in a sheet name include the
following:
Net Names
Name strings used for net names can consist of any characters (including spaces).
Related Topics
Names
Unnamed Objects
Unnamed Objects are nets, buses, or symbols to which you have not applied a name. Whether or
not you name them, the design entry tool automatically assigns a unique internal ID to each
object. All internal IDs begin with $ (for example, $1N12). If you name an object and set the
name to visible, the design entry tool displays the name.
If you copy a net, bus, or symbol, the name you applied to the original is also assigned to the
copy, but the design entry tool automatically changes the internal ID to keep it unique.
Pin names are defined by the central library symbol and you cannot change them in the design
entry tool.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Names
Name Ranges
Related Topics
Names
Name Ranges
Names can express a numerical range for a bus or a pin by specifying beginning, ending, and
incremental integer values. The design entry tool expands names with a range to create a series
of names.
The format for name ranges is:
• NAME[F:L:I]
where F is the first number, L is the last number, and I is the interval between the
numbers in the range. If no interval is specified, the interval is 1.
The following shows legal range formats:
• The name identifier A[8:C/H] is equivalent to A8, A9, AA, AB, and AC.
You can specify a bus range only with numeric characters. For example, data[b7:b0] is not a
valid format. If the bus range you want to label is decimal (for example, 7:0), use the format
data[7:0].
Related Topics
Names
Compound Names
Use compound names or bundles to label busses or pins that are not expressible as a single
range. You form a compound name with several name identifiers (with or without ranges). You
separate the names using commas. The system expands compound name identifiers separately
from left to right.
To enter a compound name, use the following format:
• NAME[F:L:I], NAME,NAME[F:L],...
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Names
Unique Names
where F is the first number, L is the last number, and I is the interval between the
numbers in the range. If no interval is specified, the interval is 1.
o A[0:3],B,D[1:4] - is equivalent to A0,A1,A2,A3,B,D1,D2,D3,D4
o A[2:1],B[3:0],C - is equivalent to A2,A1,B3,B2,B1,B0,C
Related Topics
Names
Unique Names
The design entry tool creates different types of names when components, nets, busses, or pins
are copied, arrayed, or pasted from the buffer.
Related Topics
Names
Pin Names
You specify pin names and ranges (width) with name identifiers. Pin names establish and
maintain connectivity between components. The pin range of a multi-bit pin must be identical to
the range of a connecting bus.
The exception to this is when the component has the $ARRAY property. All pins on a symbol
must have a label for identification during any netlisting process. For symbols that do not
normally have labels, such as resistors and capacitors, make the labels invisible.
Related Topics
Names
Bus Names
Bus names specify the nets contained in the bus. The names of the nets connected to the bus can
either correspond to the bus name or the nets can be aliased to different names.
Note
The Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter (choose Setup > Settings menu item,
Project category, Net Name Delimiter subcategory) enables you to control how net names
are resolved into elements of buses. See “Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter” on
page 338.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Names
Bus Names
Related Topics
Naming Connectivity Objects [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Bus Contents File Format
Names
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Names
Bus Names
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Chapter 6
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
The topics in this section provide reference information for some of the design entry tool
diagnostic tools.
Diagnostics Tool Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
DRC Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Interconnectivity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Migration Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Connectivity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Electrical Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Hierarchy Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Integrity Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Power & Ground Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Device Specific Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
HDL Checks Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Links Rules Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Diagnostics Tool Tests
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Diagnostics Tool Tests
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Diagnostics Tool Tests
Related Topics
Checking Data Integrity With the Diagnostics Tools, and Correcting Reported Errors [PADS
Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Groups
DRC Groups
The topics in this section provide reference information for the Design Rule Checker (DRC)
Verify tool rule groups.
See “Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Table 6-2 below lists each Interconnectivity Group rule description and the output message if
the rule is violated. References to specific design objects are appear as variables in the table, for
example: <schematicname>. See “Design Object References in Messages” on page 494 for
more information.
Table 6-2. Interconnectivity Rules Group Description and Message
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Output Description: Checks for unconnected Output pins
Column: Unconnected Message:
drc-107-OUT - [schematic:<schematicname>, component:
<refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin: <pinname>] OUT pin is
not connected
Row: Output Description: Checks Output - Output interconnectivity
Column: Output Message:
drc-OUT-OUT - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin: <pinname>] OUT pin
connected to OUT pin
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Table 6-3 below lists each Interconnectivity Group, Interconnected via Serial, rule description
and the message if the rule is violated. References to specific design objects appear as variables
in the table, for example: <schematicname>. See “Design Object References in Messages” on
page 494 for more information.
Table 6-3. Interconnectivity Rules Group, Interconnected via Serial -
Description and Message
Grid Intersection Rule - Description/Message
Row: Output Description: Checks Output - Input interconnectivity via serial
Column: Input Message:
drc-OUT-IN - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component:
<componentid>, pin: <pinname>] OUT pin connected to IN pin
(via serial component)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
• <bitnumber> — The bit number of a bus net. Bit numbers are ordered from left to right,
starting at 0, regardless of the index number. For example, the bit number of bus net
MyBus[0] of MyBus[31:0] is 32.
• <blockname> — The Name property value of a block on a sheet.
• <busname> — The Name property value of a bus on a sheet.
• <busnet> — The name of a net that is a member of a bus.
• <buspinwidth> — The width of a bus pin as defined by the number of nets collected
into a bus pin.
• <buswidth> — The width of a bus as defined by the number of nets collected into a bus.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <drcnchkvalue> — The DRC_NCHK property value of a component pin.
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <fpgasignalname> — The FPGA Signal Name property value of an FPGA component
pin.
• <globalnetname> — The Name property value of a global net.
• <length> — Either the number of characters of a design object’s name or value or the
maximum number of characters criteria specified by a design rule.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Interconnectivity Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Although called Migration Rules, this group of design rule checks also works on projects
created entirely in the iCDB version of the PADS Designer tool.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-001, the Verify tool reports each property name that does not use the legal
characters specified by the Legal characters option.
Note
The rules for attribute names in the pre-iCDB versions of the design entry tool are different
from the rules for property names in the iCDB versions of the design entry tool.
Message
drc-001 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>)] Property
<property> has invalid format
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-002, the Verify tool reports net or bus names (previously called labels by
the pre-iCDB versions of the design entry tool) that do not use the legal characters specified by
the Net legal characters and Bus legal characters options. If the Include port labels option is
enabled, the tool reports port labels that do not use the legal characters specified for net and bus
names.
Message
drc-002 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Net name <netname> has invalid
format
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-003, the Verify tool reports each property name that does not use the legal
characters specified by the Legal characters option.
Message
drc-003 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] Property
<property> = has invalid value format
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-004, the Verify tool reports each instance component label that does not
use the legal characters specified by the Instance component label legal characters option. The
tool reports each block component label that does not use the legal characters specified by the
Block component label legal characters option.
If you enable the Ignore port labels option, the tool does not report cases of port labels that
violate the legal characters specified for instance component or block component labels. You
can use drc-002 to report port labels that do not use legal characters.
Message
drc-004 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Label <componentid>
of component <symbolname> has invalid name format
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-005, the Verify tool reports each property name that exceeds the
maximum length specified by the “Max. number of characters” option.
Message
drc-005 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] Property
<property> name length <length> exceeds max value <length>
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-006, the Verify tool reports each property value that exceeds the
maximum length specified by the Max. number of characters option.
Message
drc-006 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>)] Property
<property> = <propertyvalue> value <length> exceeds max value <length>
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-007, the Verify tool reports each net name that exceeds the maximum
length specified by the Max. number of characters option.
Message
drc-007 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Net label <netname> value name
length <length> defined in exceeds max value <length>
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-008, the Verify tool reports each symbol name (not the symbol file name)
thats exceed the maximum length specified by the Max. number of characters option.
Message
drc-008 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Label <componentid>
value name length <length> of component <symbolname> exceeds max value <length>
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-009, the Verify tool reports each symbol that uses a property that is not
common between the schematic and the central library property definition file (centlib.prp).
Examples of non-common properties that result from a migration include Height, Value, or
Description.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Migration Rules Group
Note
In the pre-iCDB versions of the design entry tool properties are upper-case (all caps). In the
iCDB versions of the design entry tool, properties may be leading cap or mixed-case.
Message
drc-009 - [symbol: <symbolname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] A non-
common property: <property>
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
The connectivity rule checks use the Pin Type (Integrated) or PINTYPE (Netlist) properties that
you assign to pins. For more information, see “Pin Type (PINTYPE)” in the
PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-101, the Verify tool reports each net that connects a pin with Pin Type
OUT to another pin with Pin Type BI. An output pin is assumed to be driving at all times. A
bidirectional pin drives a net when an output enable is set. In a situation where the bidirectional
pin is enabled, the net is over-driven and could damage a component.
Message
drc-101 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Output and bidirectional pins are
connected together
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Description
When you enable drc-102, the Verify tool reports each net that connects a pin with Pin Type
OUT to another pin with Pin Type TRI. An output pin is assumed to be driving at all times. A
tristate pin drives a net when an output enable is set. In a situation where the tristate pin is
enabled, the net is over-driven and could damage a component.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Message
drc-102 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Output and tristate pins are
connected together
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Description
When you enable drc-103 , the Verify tool reports each net that does not connect a pin with Pin
Type OUT to a receiving pin with Pin Type IN or BI.
If you enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option, the Verify tool disregards the specified
symbols, such as resistors, that have a single electrical path through them. If an input pin is on
the other side of the serial symbol, the design rule check passes.
You specify serial symbols in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Serial Symbols specification
example of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Message
drc-103 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname> Sheet: <sheetname>] Net not
connected to a load
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.
Example
This circuit violates drc-103 because net MyUnloadedNet driven by output pin OUTpin does
not connect to an input pin. Instead net MyUnloadedNet connects to a serial symbol that is then
connected to a component with bidirectional pin BIpin. To treat serial symbols as transparent,
enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
• Load property (must exist in Property Definition File) — The name of the pin load
property. Default: “DRC Pin Load”.
• Default Drive — Default pin drive value to be used if a pin does not have a DRC Pin
Drive property value.
• Default Load — Default pin load value to be used if a pin does not have a DRC Pin
Load property value.
• Hierarchical Pin Load — Hierarchical pin (port) load value.
• Physical Pin Load — Pin load value assigned to physical elements, such as routing, vias,
and packaging, connected to a net.
• Input Load — Report cases of nets connected to pins with Pin Type IN.
• Bi-directional Load — Report cases of nets connected to pins with Pin Type BI.
Description
When you enable drc-104, the Verify tool reports each net with a total net load that exceeds the
highest pin drive value.
The tool calculates total net load for each net as follows:
Total net load = Sum of pin load values connected to the net + sum of hierarchical pin (port)
load values connected to the net + sum of physical pin load values connected to the net
You specify the value of the DRC Pin Drive property and the DRC Pin Load property on each
symbol pin. See “Verify DRC Properties” in the PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.
If you do not specify the Pin Drive and Pin Load properties, then the tool calculates pin drive
and pin load based on the values specified by the Default Drive and Default Load options.
Message
drc-104 - [flatnet: <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Net load <netloadvalue> exceeds
specified maximum driving capability <pindrivevalue> of net driver
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
• <netloadvalue> — The sum total of pin, port, and physical pin load values connected to
a net.
• <pindrivevalue> — The maximum pin drive capability of a component.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Pin Drive [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC Pin Load [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-105, the Verify tool reports each net that does not connect to a pin with
Pin Type OUT to a pin with Pin Type IN.
If you enable the Bi-directional Load option, the tool reports each net that does not connect a
pin with Pin Type OUT to a pin with Pin Type BI.
If you enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option, the tool disregards serial symbols. If an output
or bidirectional pin is on the other side of the serial component, the design rule check passes.
You specify serial symbols in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Serial Symbols specification
example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.
Message
drc-105 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Un-driven net
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-106, the Verify tool reports each net that does not connect to a pin with
Pin Type OUT to a pin with Pin Type IN.
If you enable the Bi-directional Load option, the tool reports each net that does not connect a
pin with Pin Type OUT to a pin with Pin Type BI.
If you enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option, the tool disregards serial symbols. If an output
or bidirectional pin is on the other side of the serial component, the design rule check passes.
You specify serial symbols in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Serial Symbols specification
example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Message
drc-106 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] More than one driver on a net
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-107, the Verify tool reports each component pin that is not connected to a
net. You can configure the rule to ignore pins with certain pin types. See “Preventing Errors for
Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs)” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Message
drc-107 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component:
<refdesignator>([<path>]<componentid>), pin: <pinname>] <pintype> pin is not connected
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-108, the Verify tool reports each net that is not connected at one or two
ends. A dangling net, or net stub, is a net that is unconnected at one end, while a hanging net is
a net that is unconnected at both ends. The tool checks nets only; bus segments are ignored. See
“Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets (Net Stubs)” in the
PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Message
drc-108 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] dangling
net segment
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
• Check for missing rippers on nets — Optionally reports any bus signal used outside bus
without ripper to this bus (but connected to it by name).
Description
When you enable drc-109 connectivity check with the “Check for un-ripped nets” option, the
Verify tool reports each bus that includes a bus element that is not ripped out as a net. When you
enable drc-109 connectivity check with the “Check for missing rippers on nets” option is
enabled, the Verify tool reports each bus that includes a bus element that is ripped out as a net
but is not connected to a pin.
Note
If a bus is connected to a bus pin, the Verify tool will not report any unripped or unused bus
elements.
Message
drc-109 - [schematic: <schematicname>, bus: <busname>] Bus <busname> contains un-
ripped net '<netname>'
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-109 “Check for un-ripped nets” option because the net, MyBus0, is not
ripped from the bus, MyBus[3:0], and violates drc-109 “Check for missing rippers on nets”
because the net, MyBus1, is not connected.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Description
When you enable drc-110, the Verify tool reports nets that graphically overlap along the same
axis. This check does not consider net crossings.
Message
drc-110 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: <netname>] Net overlaps with
net: "<netname>"
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-110 because net, NetOverlapA, vertically overlaps net, NetOverlapB,
along the vertical axis.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Description
When you enable drc-111, the Verify tool reports each undriven net that connects multiple pins
with Pin Type IN or BI on the same component. The tool ignores single unconnected input pins.
If you enable the “Ignore serial symbols” option, the tool disregards series components. If an
output pin is on the other side of the serial component, the design rule check passes.
You specify serial symbols in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Serial Symbols specification
example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.
Message
drc-111 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname> Sheet:
<schematicname>.<sheetname>] Un-driven input component pins
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Example
This circuit violates drc-111 because net, MyUndrivenCommonNet, is undriven and connects to
multiple input pins, INpin1 and INpin2, of a common component.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Description
When you enable drc-112, the Verify tool reports each pin with Pin Type IN or Pin Type BI that
connect to one of the specified connector symbols.
You specify connector symbol names in the Connector(s) option Value field as:
symbol_partition:symbol name. You may use wildcard character (*) to match symbol names.
For example, Connectors:CONN_44p.* matches: Connectors:CONN_44p.1,
Connectors:CONN_44p.2, or anything similar.
Note
Use an asterick (*) wildcard to represent one or more characters, or a question mark (?)
wildcard to represent a single character.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Message
drc-112 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] <pintype>
pin '<pinname>' connected only to connector '<symbolname>'
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <pintype> — The Pin Type property value of a component or block pin.
• <symbolname> — The Symbol Name property value of a component on a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-113, the Verify tool reports input pins that connect only to one of the
specified connector symbols or another component input pin.
You specify connector symbol names in the Connector(s) option Value field as:
symbol_partition:symbol name. You may use wildcard characters (*) to represent one or more
characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For example,
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Message
drc-113 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Inputs only
connected to connectors or to another component input
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-114, the Verify tool reports two-pin components, such as resistors and
capacitors, that do not connect to a driver.
Message
drc-114 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Dipole only connected
to input pins
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-114 because both pins of a two-pin, dipole component are connected to
input pins, and no net driver.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-115, the Verify tool reports two-pin components, such as resistors and
capacitors, that do not connect to a driver.
Message
drc-115 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Dipole only connected
to bidirectional pins
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-115 because both pins of a two-pin, dipole component are connected to
bidirectional pins.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-116, the Verify tool reports each power or ground net that connects to a
pin with Pin Type OUT, BI, TRI, OEM, or OCL.
In the Ignore symbols option Value field, you may use wildcard characters (*) to represent one
or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For example,
Resistor:* matches: Resistor:101-RES, Resistor:102-RES, or anything similar.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
You specify power and ground nets one of the following ways:
• Global nets you add to the schematic with a POWER or GROUND Special Component.
• Assign the Power Supply Net property to a net.
• The VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See an example in the Power and Ground
Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610.
Message
drc-116 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Output pin directly connected to Power/Ground
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-117, the Verify tool reports each pin with Pin Type OUT that is connected
to another pin with Pin Type OUT or BI of the same or another component. The connection may
be direct or through a specified resistor symbol.
In the Resistors option Value field, you may use wildcard characters (*) to represent one or
more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For example,
Resistor:* matches: Resistor:101-RES, Resistor:102-RES, or anything similar.
Optionally, you can specify resistors in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Resistors
specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on
page 609.
Message
drc-117 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Output pin
connected to bidirectional pin
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Reports when an input pin of a component is connected to an output or bi-directional pin of the
same, either directly or through a resistor. Specify the resistor symbol in the options as
'symbol_partition:symbol name'.
Description
When you enable drc-118, the Verify tool reports each pin with Pin Type IN that connects to a
pin with Pin Type OUT or BI of the same component. The connection may be direct or through
a specified resistor symbol.
In the Resistors option Value field, you may use wildcard characters (*) to represent one or
more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For example,
Resistor:* matches: Resistor:101-RES, Resistor:102-RES, or anything similar.
Optionally, you can specify resistors in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the Resistors
specification example of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.
Message
drc-118 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Input pin
connected to <pintype> pin "<pinname>" of the same component
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Example
This circuit violates drc-118 in two ways:
• Input pin, INpin1, is connected to output pin, OUTpin3, via a resistor component.
• Input pin, INpin2, is connected to output pin, OUTpin3, directly.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-119, the Verify tool reports each two pin component, such as a resistor or
a capacitor, with a net connecting the pins.
Message
drc-119 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Dipole pin is shorted to '<pinname>'
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Where:
Message
drc-120 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Width mismatch across
component
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Example
This circuit violates drc-120 because the bus range is mismatched across the component. Bit
number 0 of bus XBus[3:0] (XBus3) is connected to bit number 3 of bus YBus[3:0] (YBus0).
This circuit violates drc-120 because the bus width is mismatched across the component. The
single-bit width net, ANet, connects to the 2-bit bus, BBus[1:0].
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Buses [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Description
The Verify tool tests three types of connectivity:
• Intra-page - Two or more nets on the same sheet, with the same name that are not
physically connected.
• Inter-page - Two or more nets on different sheets of the same schematic that have the
same name.
• Hierarchical - An external net in a schematic sheet that does not have a corresponding
pin on the corresponding symbol.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
• Intra-page connection symbol(s) — Space delimited list of connection symbols that join
nets within a sheet. For example, “builtin:con_inter_bi.* builtin:con_inter_i.*
builtin:con_inter_o.*”.
• Intra-page checks — Report nets that are missing intra-page (internal) connection
symbols.
• Inter-page checks — Report nets that are missing inter-page (flat) connection symbols.
• Hierarchical checks — Report nets in a schematic sheet that do not have a corresponding
pin on the corresponding hierarchical symbol.
• Duplicate symbols connected to one net — Report nets that connect to duplicated
connection symbols.
• Report extra intra-page or inter-page connection on nets — Report nets that connect to
extra (redundant) intra-page or inter-page connections.
• Use Link symbols as Intra-page and Inter-page symbols — Report intra-page or inter-
page nets that do not connect to a link symbol.
Tip
Use a different symbol for each type of check. If you use the same symbol for all checks,
and then run all checks at one time, you may see unexpected interactions and associated
erroneous messages.
Description
When you enable drc-121, the Verify tool reports nets that are not connected via specific
symbols.
In the Inter-page and Intra-page connection symbol(s) option Value fields, you may use
wildcard characters (*) to represent one or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to
represent a single character. For example, builtin:con_inter_bi.* matches:
builtin:con_inter_bi.1, builtin:con_inter_bi.2, or anything similar.
Message
drc-121 - [schematic: <schematicname>.<sheetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Missing
internal connection symbols on net
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-121 intra-page connectivity check because the internal connection
symbol(s) specified by the “Intra-page connection symbol(s)” option is missing from net
MyNotPCN.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
This circuit violates drc-121 inter-page connectivity check because the flat symbol(s) specified
by the “Inter-page connection symbol(s)” option is missing from the net MyNotPCNy at the
MySchematic.2 sheet.
This circuit violates drc-121 hierarchical connectivity check because the block instance
MyChildBlock has a pin MyNotPCNz but the schematic MyChildBlock is missing a matching
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
hierarchical symbol on the net MyNotPCNz. The Verify tool reports this condition as “Missing
hierarchical symbol on net”.
This circuit violates drc-121 hierarchical connectivity check because the MyChildBlock
schematic has a hierarchical symbol on the net MyNotPCNz but the block instance
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
MyChildBlock is missing a matching pin. The Verify tool reports this condition as “Extra flat
symbol on net”.
This circuit violates drc-121 “Duplicate symbols connected to one net” option because the net,
“duplicate”, connects to multiple inter-page connection symbols. The second instance of the
connection symbol is not required.
This circuit violates drc-121 “Report extra intra-page or inter-page connection on nets” option
because the net “redundant”, connects to multiple inter-page connection symbols. The second
instance of the connection symbol is not required.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-123, the Verify tool reports any net connected to only one pin.
Message
drc-123 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] One pin net
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• [<path>] — (Optional) The hierarchical path to the design object. The path appears if
you enable the “Show hierarchical path” option (choose Tools > Verify menu item,
Settings category).
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.
• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connectivity With Nets [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-124, the Verify tool reports any discrepancy in the number of bits in a bus
and the component/block pin to which it connects. Optionally, it can report a net connected to a
bus pin or a bus pin connected to a single bit pin.
Message
drc-124 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Pin
(<pinwidth> width) is connected to a bus of a different range (<buswidth> width)
drc-124 - [schematic: Logical System View, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Pin
(<pinwidth> width) is connected to a bus of a different range (<buswidth> width)
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Checks if one or more pins of a component or a group of components are connected to one of
the nets listed in the pin property DRC_NCHK. Several net classes can be defined for a given
pin.
Description
When you enable drc-125, the Verify tool reports each component and pin that connects to a net
class and net specified by the DRC_NCLS (net class) and DRC_NCHK (net check) properties.
You specify the net class property DRC_NCLS on a symbol. For example, assigning the net
class/value pair DRC_NCLS=POWER to one or more symbols indicates that a net from the
POWER net class must connect to the component.
You specify the net check property DRC_NCHK on a symbol pin. For example, assigning the
net class/value pair: DRC_NCHK=POWER;VCC*,VDD*, indicates that the pin is associated
with a component from the POWER net class and must connect to the VCC* or VDD* nets.
Note
Use an asterisk (*) wildcard character to represent one or more characters, or a question
mark (?) wildcard character to represent a single character.
See “Verify DRC Properties” in the PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.
The Verify tool checks the net class that you specify with the DRC Net Class Default in the
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. For example, the net class default property, shown
below, indicates that the Verify checks the POWER net class. See the DRC Net Class Default
specification example of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.
<Defines>
<Option Name="net_class_default" Value="POWER" />
</Defines>
Optionally, you can specify the name of the DRC_NCHK and DRC_NCLS properties in the
VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the DRC Net Check Property name, DRC Net Class Property name
specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on
page 609.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Message
drc-125 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Pin
with "DRC_NCHK" attribute is connected to wrong net [<path>]<netname>. Expected
<drcnchkvalue>
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-125 because PIN1 connects to the GND global net instead of one of the
POWER net class nets: VCC* or VDD*.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC_NCHK [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC_NCLS [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-126, the Verify tool reports each bus that has an inconsistent width or a
bus member mismatch, bit-to-bit.
Message
drc-126 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>]
<buspinwidth> bit wide pin <pinname> is connected to <buswidth> bit bus/bus content
<busname>
Where:
Example
Bus Width Check Examples:
• A circuit that connects the 7-bit bus, MYBUS=A,B,C[3:0],D, to the 3-bit bus, DD[2:0],
violates drc-126 because the bus widths do not match.
• A circuit that connects a 5-bit bus, ADDR[4:0], to a 6-bit bus, ADDRESS[5:0], violates
drc-126 because the bus widths to not match.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Description
When drc-127 is enabled, the Verify tool reports each pin that is disconnected even if they
appear to connect to a net or bus. You can specify the minimum distance from the pin to the net
or bus with the Radius option.
Message
drc-127 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Unconnected pin is near dangling net '<netname>' end
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Message
drc-128 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: [<path>]<netname>] Net [<netalias>] is an
alias, please check this is intentional
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Connectivity Rules Group
Message
drc-129 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] '<symbolname>'
symbol connected to named net '[<path>]<netname>'
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-201, the Verify tool reports each Open Collector type (OCL) pin that is
not connected to a pull-up resistor that you specify in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the
example in the Resistors row of Table 6-4 on page 610.
Message
drc-201 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Open
Collector pin is not pulled up
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-202, the Verify tool reports each Open Emitter type (OEM) pin that is not
connected to a pull-down resistor that you specify in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example
in the Resistors row of Table 6-4 on page 610.
Message
drc-202 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Open
Emitter pin is not pulled down
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-203, the Verify tool reports each polarized component specified that does
not connect to the correct polarity ground or power net specified. The tool reports incorrectly
named polarized nets that connect to a power supply.
You specify each polarized component symbol in the Voltage Drop Components option Value
field as: “<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character.
For example, Sample.cappol.* matches: Sample.cappol.1, Sample.cappol.2, or anything similar.
You assign the DRC Positive property to the positive pin and the DRC Negative property to the
negative pin of each component symbol specified. See “Verify DRC Properties” in the
PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.
Optionally, you can specify the DRC Positive property and DRC Negative property names in
the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example in the DRC Positive Property row in Table 6-4 on
page 610.
You specify the polarized power and ground nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example
in the Power and Ground Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610.
Message
drc-203 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Positive pin is
connected to lower voltage level than the negative pin
Where:
Example
The right-most circuit violates drc-203 because the positive pin is connected to a lower voltage
level (GND) than the negative pin (+5V).
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Positive [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC Negative [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-204, the Verify tool reports each component specified that has a voltage
drop less than the minimum voltage tolerance value or greater than the maximum voltage
tolerance value.
You specify each component symbol in the Component Symbol(s) option Value field as:
<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>. You may use an asterisk character (*) to represent one
or more characters, or a question mark (?) character, to represent a single character. For
example, “Sample.cappol.*” matches: Sample.cappol.1, Sample.cappol.2, or anything similar.
You specify the minimum and maximum voltage tolerance values in the Min Value; Max Value
option Value field. For example: 50mV;2.2V applies to all of the symbols specified by the
Components Symbol(s) option. Use a zero (0) to the left of the decimal point (.) to specify a
DRC Voltage property value that is less than 1.0. For example: use “0.5V” instead of “.5V”.
Note
You may specify electrical and electronic engineering units of voltage tolerance values with
a single character abbreviation as follows: Atto - a, Femto - f, Pico - p, Nano - n, Micro - u,
Milli - m, Kilo - k , Mega - M, Giga - G, and Tera - T.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group
An alternative to specifying a voltage tolerance to all specified symbols, is to assign the DRC
Voltage property and value to a symbol or part in the central library, or a component instance in
the schematic. You assign the DRC Voltage property to the specified component symbol. See
“Verify DRC Properties” in the PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.
The tool uses zero volts (0V) to calculate the value of ground nets.
You specify the power and ground nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See the
example in the Power and Ground Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610. The Verify tool reports:
“...Voltage drop cannot be calculated...” if a net that is not specified as a power or ground is
connected to a specified resistor.
Message
drc-204 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Calculated Voltage
Drop <voltagevalue> is lower than defined Min value <voltagevalue>
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-204 because the 5V voltage drop across the 100 ohm resistor exceeds
the resistor’s maximum voltage tolerance of 1.8V.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Voltage [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-205, the Verify tool reports each component specified that has a power
dissipation less than the minimum power tolerance value or greater than the maximum power
tolerance value.
You specify each resistor symbol in the Resistor Symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use the wildcard character (*) to represent
one or more characters, or a question mark (?) wildcard to represent a single character. For
example, Sample.resistor.*: Sample.resistor.1, Sample.resistor.2, or anything similar.
You specify the minimum and maximum power tolerance values in the Min Value; Max Value
option Value field. For example: 200mW;500mW applies to all of the symbols specified by the
Resistor Symbol(s) option. Use a zero (0) to the left of the decimal point (.) to specify a DRC
Power property value that is less than 1.0. For example: use “0.25W” instead of “.25W”. An
alternative to specifying a power tolerance to all specified symbols, is to assign the DRC Power
property to a symbol or part in the central library, or a component instance in the schematic.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group
Note
You may specify electrical and electronic engineering units with a single character
abbreviation as follows: Atto - a, Femto - f, Pico - p, Nano - n, Micro - u, Milli - m, Kilo - k
, Mega - M, Giga - G, and Tera - T.
You assign a resistance value to the Value property of each resistor component associated with
the resistor symbols you specified to check.
For each resistor symbol specified, you assign the DRC Positive property to the symbol pin that
connects to the power net and the DRC Negative property to the symbol pin that connects to the
ground net. See “Verify DRC Properties” in the PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.
You specify the power and ground nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example in the
Power and Ground Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610. The Verify tool reports: “...Voltage drop
cannot be calculated...” if a net that is not specified as a power or ground is connected to a
specified resistor.
Message
drc-205 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Calculated dissipated
power <powervalue> exceeds defined Max Power Rating <powervalue>
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group
Example
This circuit violates drc-205 because the power dissipation of 0.0144W ((1.2V^2)/100ohms)
across the 100 ohm resistor connected to a +1.2V power supply, is lower than the resistor’s
minimum power tolerance of 0.02W (20mW).
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Power [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC Positive [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
DRC Negative [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-206, the Verify tool reports each pin with a Tristate (TRI) pin type that
does not connect to a specified power or ground net through a specified resistor symbol.
You specify resistors in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults file). See the example in the
Resistors row of Table 6-4 on page 610.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Electrical Rules Group
You specify the polarized power and ground nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini file. See the example
in the Power and Ground Nets row of Table 6-4 on page 610. An alternative to specifying
power and ground nets in VerifyDefaults.ini is to assign the Power Supply Net property to the
net.
Message
drc-206 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Tristate pin is not pulled up or down
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-301, the Verify tool reports each block symbol pin that does not match the
port type of the child schematic.
Message
drc-301 - [symbol: <symbolname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>], Pin Type
mismatch -- symbol=<pintype>, schematic=<pintype>
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-302, the Verify tool reports each block symbol pin that has no
corresponding port on the child schematic.
Message
drc-302 - [symbol: <symbolname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] No corresponding
hierarchical I/O found underneath
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-303, the Verify tool reports each block that is missing an underlying
schematic.
Message
drc-303 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>] Missing composite symbol
underlying schematic
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-304, the Verify tool reports each net connects to multiple ports of a child
schematic.
Message
drc-304 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: [<path>]\<netname>] is connected to two
hierarchical ports of different names (<portname>, <portname>)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-305, the Verify tool reports each net connects to a child schematic port
with a mismatched name.
Message
drc-305 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] The Port is
connected to a net with different name '<netname>'
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Hierarchy Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-401, the Verify tool reports each component that is missing a specified
property.
If you enable the “Check for missing value” option, the Verify tool reports each component that
includes a specified property but is missing a value.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Message
drc-401 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Missing symbol
property '<property>'
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-402, the Verify tool reports each component pin that is missing a
specified property.
If you enable the “Check for missing value” option, the Verify tool reports each component pin
that includes a specified property but is missing a value.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Message
drc-402 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Missing symbol pin property '<property>'
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-403, the Verify tool reports each block symbol that is missing a specified
property.
If you enable the “Check for missing value” option, the Verify tool reports each block symbol
that includes a specified property but is missing a value.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Message
drc-403 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>] Missing block property
'<property>'
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-404, the Verify tool reports each block symbol pin that does not match the
port type of the child schematic.
If you enable the “Check for missing value” option, the Verify tool reports each block symbol
pin that includes a specified property but is missing a value.
Message
drc-404 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Missing
block pin property '<property>'
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-405, the Verify tool reports each PIN type symbol, also referred to as a
hierarchical pin (port) symbol, that is missing a pin.
Message
drc-405 - [symbol: <symbolname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] PIN type symbol
<symbolname> has no pin when exactly one pin is expected
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Hierarchical Pin (Port) Symbol Requirements [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Description
When you enable drc-406, the Verify tool reports each PIN type symbol, also referred to as
hierarchical pin (port) symbol, that has multiple pins.
Message
drc-406 - [symbol: <symbolname>, component: [<path>]\<componentid>] PIN type symbol
<symbolname> has multiple pins when exactly one pin is expected
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-407, the Verify tool reports each bus or net name with an odd number of
parentheses or brackets such as “BUSA[8:0” and “NET44)”.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Message
drc-407 - [schematic: <schematicname>, bus: <busname>] Odd number of brackets in bus
name: <busname>
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-408, the Verify tool reports each symbol in a schematic that overlap. The
symbols must have the same orientation and size to be reported as overlapping.
Message
drc-408 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Component
<componentid> overlaps component <componentid>.
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-409, the Verify tool reports each net segment name that differs from a
parent net name because of letter case or a name delimiter.
Message
drc-409 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Net segment name '<netname>'
differentiate from parent net name: <netname>
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-410, the Verify tool reports each:
• Pin type symbol mapped as Power that does not have a pin with Pin Type POWER.
• Pin type symbol mapped as Ground that does not have a Pin Type GROUND.
See “Power and Ground Symbol Requirements” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Message
drc-410 - [symbol: <symbolname>, component: <componentid>] Global symbol
'<symbolname>' mapped as Power has wrong pintype '<pintype>' ( expected 'Power' ) on
symbol pin '<pinname>'
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-411, the Verify tool reports each symbol that does not map to a part in the
central library correctly.
Message
drc-411 - [Part: <partnumber>, component: <componentid>] Wrong symbol '<symbolname>'
used for Part Number '<partnumber>'
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Integrity Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating Parts [PADS Library Tools User's Guide]
Description
When you enable drc-412, the Verify tool reports each symbol that does not exist in the central
library.
Message
drc-412 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Symbol
<symbolname> does not exist in Central Library
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
The power and ground rules use the Pin Type (Integrated) or PINTYPE (Netlist) properties of
symbol pins. For more information, see “Pin Type (PINTYPE)” in the
PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary.
Description
When you enable drc-501, the Verify tool reports each global net that connects to a pin with a
Pin Type property value of OUT.
If you enable the “Report pins” option, the Verify tool reports each component and output pin
name connected to a global net.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Message
drc-501 - [flatnet : <flatnetname>, net: <netname> Sheet: <sheetname>] Global net connected
to output pins
Where:
• <flatnetname> — The flat net name related to the net name on a sheet of a schematic
block. Flat nets are the nets of a flattened netlist without design hierarchy.
• <netname> — The Name property value of a net.
• <sheetname> — The Name property value of a sheet.
• <schematicname> — The Name property value of a schematic block.
• <componentid> — The Id property value of a component on a sheet.
• <pinname> — The Name property value of a component or block pin.
• <globalnetname> — The Name property value of a global net.
Example
This circuit violates drc-501 because global net AGNDX is connected to an output type pin.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-502, the Verify tool reports each global signal name that is not in the list
of legal global net names specified by the Names option.
Message
drc-502 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Global net name not listed in
legal_globals
Where:
Example
Given the Names option value “VCC GND +3.3V” this circuit violates drc-502 because global
net +12V is not in the list.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Pin Type (PINTYPE) [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-503, the Verify tool reports each local net that is in the list of legal global
net names specified by the Names option.
Message
drc-503 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Local net name is listed in
legal_globals
Where:
Description
When you enable drc-504, the Verify tool reports each net that connects to a Global Signal pin
caused by a short between Global Symbols. The tool also reports each wire segment (dangling
net) used as a Global Signal but not terminated by a Global Symbol.
For example, the Global Signal property, in the VerifyDefaults.ini file below defines several
global power and ground signals.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
<Defines>
<Option Name="global_signal" Value="VCC +48V +5V -3.3V +3.3V +1.8V
+1.2V CGND GND +0V* G0V* A0V*" />
</Defines>
Message
drc-504 - [schematic: <schematicname>, net: <netname>] Wire '<netname>' is used as a
global signal in this design, no global TAP symbol found on this segment '<netname>'. All such
wires must be terminated by a TAP symbol with the correct Global Signal Name property
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-504 because global net “+48V” connects to a dangling wire segment.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Description
When you enable drc-505, the Verify tool reports each component with a supply pin connected
to the wrong voltage.
You assign the DRC Supply Pin property to each pin that you want to verify connects to a net
with a valid polarity voltage value. A value of “Pos” indicates the pin must connect to a net
name preceded with a plus sign (+), such as “+3.3V”, to pass the check. A value of “Neg”
indicates the pin must connect to a net name preceded with a minus sign (-), to pass the check.
Optionally, you can specify the DRC Supply Pin property name in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.
See an example in the DRC Supply Pin name row in Table 6-4 on page 610.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Message
drc-505 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Supply Pin is connected to wrong voltage.
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-505 because the component with pin 2 with a DRC Supply Pin property
value of ‘Neg’ is connected to the +12V global net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
Description
When you enable drc-506, the Verify tool reports each unconnected pin with a DRC Supply Pin
property.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
You assign the DRC Supply Pin property to each pin that you want to confirm is connected to a
power net.
Optionally, you can specify the DRC Supply Pin property name in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.
See an example in the DRC Supply Pin name row in Table 6-4 on page 610.
Message
drc-506 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Supply pin is not connected.
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-506 because component pin 40 has a DRC Supply Pin property but is
not connected.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Supply Pin [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Reports when a 'Supply pin' is not connected to the expected nets listed in the Values column.
Description
When you enable drc-507, the Verify tool reports each pin with a DRC Supply Pin property that
does not connect to a specified power or ground net.
You assign the DRC Supply Pin property to each pin that you want to verify is connected to a
power net.
Optionally, you can specify the DRC Supply Pin property name in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.
See an example in the DRC Supply Pin name row in Table 6-4 on page 610.
Message
drc-507 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>]
Supply pin is connected to incorrect Power/Ground net.
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Example
Given Power net names(s) option value “POWER VCC VPP” this circuit violates drc-507
because component pin 90 is not connected to a net named POWER, VCC, or VPP.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
DRC Supply Pin [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-508, the Verify tool reports each implicit or explicit power supply pin that
does not connect to a specified connector. See “Explicit/Implicit Power Supply Definition” in
the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
You specify each connector symbol in the Connector(s) option Value field as:
<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>. You may use the asterisk character (*) to match symbol
names. For example, Sample:pci_120.* matches: Sample:pci_120.1, Sample:pci_120.2, or
anything similar.
Message
drc-508 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] Explicit Ground pin
'<pinname>' not connected to connector
Where:
Example
Given the Connector(s) option value “BIcomponent.*” this circuit violates drc-508 because the
component pin 1 GROUNDpin is not connected to a BIcomponent connector component.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
Description
When you enable drc-509, the Verify tool reports each global net that connects to a block pin.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Message
drc-509 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Global net
'<netname>' connected to block pin
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-509 because the block pin Reset is connected to the GND global net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Hierarchical Designs [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Port Usage [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-510, the Verify tool reports each symbol with a power or ground pin that
is not connected to a power supply net or has fewer connections than the minimum number
specified.
You specify each FPGA symbol in the FPGA Symbol(s) option Value field as:
<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>. You may use wildcard characters (*) to match symbol
names. For example, “IC:LCMXO3L_Bank*.*” matches: IC:LCMXO3L-
1300_PartitionBank0.1, IC:LCMXO3L_PartitionBank1.1 or anything similar.
Message
drc-510 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>)]
<objectcount> [power|ground] pins found on the symbol when <minimum> were expected
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Example
Given a FPGA symbol(s) value, “FPGAs:LAMXO256C-TQFP100_NoBank.?”, and Ground
option value 4, this circuit violates drc-510 because the component has fewer than four Ground
type pins and because pin 40 is a Ground type pin but is not connected to a power supply net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating a User-Defined Property [PADS Library Tools User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-511, the Verify tool reports each component power or ground type pin
that does not connect to a power supply net.
Message
drc-511 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>, pin: <pinname>] Pin of
Pin Type <pintype> is not connected to a power supply net
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-511 because component pin 90 VCC is a power type pin but is not
connected to a power supply net.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Creating a User-Defined Property [PADS Library Tools User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Power & Ground Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
• Connection to: strap, no resistor — Report each pin that connects to a strap but not a
resistor.
• Connection to: no resistor, no strap — Report each pin that is not connected to a resistor
and a strap.
• Connection to: no resistor — Report each pin that is not connected to a resistor.
Description
When you enable drc-601, the Verify tool reports each specified pin of the specified IC symbol
that does not connect to the circuit elements that you specify with the check options.
You specify each IC symbol in the IC symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk wildcard character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark wildcard character (?) to represent a single
character. For example, “Sample:74HCT174.?” matches Sample:74HCT174.1,
Sample:74HCT174.2, or anything similar.
You specify each power and ground pin of the IC symbol in the Pin(s) option Value field. For
example, “VCC” “VSS” “GND”.
You specify each strap (jumper) symbol in the IC symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”.
You specify each resistor symbol in the Resistor(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”.
You can specify power and ground nets using one of the following ways:
Message
drc-601 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] Pin is connected to a resistor but strap is missing
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-601 because pin VCC-2 connects to a resistor and a strap but not to a
power supply.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-603, the Verify tool reports each specified direction-control or output-
enable pin of the specified transceiver symbols that connects to a power or ground net.
You specify each transceiver symbol in the Transceiver symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk wildcard character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark wildcard character (?) to represent a single
character. For example, “IC:DIFF-DVR-RCVR.?” matches IC:DIFF-DVR-RCVR.1, IC:DIFF-
DVR-RCVR.2, or anything similar.
You specify the name of each direction-control pin of the transceiver symbol in the Direction-
control pin(s) option Value field.
You specify the name of each output-enable pin of the transceiver symbol in the Output-enable
pin(s) option Value field.
You can specify power and ground nets using one of the following ways:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
• Specify ground and power nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See the
Power and Ground Nets specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini
Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.
Message
drc-603 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] Direction-control pin is connected to the power/ground net '<netname>'
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-603 because the direction-control pin DE connects to a power net VCC.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-604, the Verify tool reports each input pin of the specified operational
amplifier symbols that connect to a power or ground net directly or via a specified resistor.
You specify each operational amplifier symbol in the Op. Amp. symbol(s) option Value field
as: “<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk wildcard character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark wildcard character (?) to represent a single
character. For example, “Sample:OPAMP_DUAL.?” matches Sample:OPAMP_DUAL.1,
Sample:OPAMP_DUAL.2, or anything similar.
You specify differential input pins in the “Differential pairs(s)” option Value field.
You specify each resistor symbol in the Resistor Symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”.
You can specify power and ground nets using one of the following ways:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
• Specify ground and power nets in the VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) file. See the
Power and Ground Nets specification example in Table 6-4 of “VerifyDefaults.ini
Prerequisites for Verify DRC” on page 609.
Message
drc-604 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] Differential input is connected through resistor '<symbolname> to power net
'<netname>'
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-604 because the differential input IN- is connected through a resistor to
power net VCC.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Connecting Nets to Power or Ground [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
Description
When you enable drc-605, the Verify tool reports each N-pin capacitor that does not connect all
input pins to a common net or all output pins to a common net.
You specify each N-pin capacitor symbol in the N pin capacitor symbol(s) option Value field
as: “<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk character (*) to represent
one or more characters, or a question mark (?) to represent a single character. For example,
Sample:MSECCAP.* matches: Sample:MSECCAP.1, Sample:MSECCAP.2, or anything
similar.
Message
drc-605 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] Component pins on one side must be connected together
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
Description
When you enable drc-606, the Verify tool reports each specified output pin of the specified bus
driver that connects to a ground or power net.
You specify each bus driver symbol in the Driver symbol(s) option Value field as:
“<symbol_partition>:<symbol_name>”. You may use an asterisk wildcard character (*) to
represent one or more characters, or a question mark wildcard character (?) to represent a single
character. For example, “Sample:74_245.?” matches: Sample:74_245.1, Sample:74_245.2, or
anything similar.
You specify direction control pin names in the Direction control pin(s) option Value field.
You specify the names of output pins that are enabled when the direction control pin is logical 0
in the “Logical zero output pin(s)” option Value field.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Device Specific Rules Group
You specify the names of output pins that are enabled when the direction control pin is logical 1
in the “Logical one output pin(s)” option Value field.
You can specify power and ground nets using one of the following ways:
Message
drc-606 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <refdesignator>(<componentid>), pin:
<pinname>] The outputs of the bus driver are hardwired to power supply signal '<netname>'
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-701, the Verify tool reports each pin name or net name that contains a
reserved VHDL keyword.
Message
drc-701 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Pin name
'<pinname>' contains reserved VHDL keyword
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group
Examples
This circuit violates drc-701 because the symbol pin name “abs” contains a reserved VHDL
keyword.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-702, the Verify tool reports each pin name or net name that contains a
reserved Verilog keyword.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group
Message
drc-702 - [schematic: schematicname, block: blockname, pin: pinname] Pin name 'pinname'
contains reserved Verilog keyword
drc-702 - [schematic: schematicname, net: netname] Net name 'netname' contains reserved
Verilog keyword
Where:
Examples
This circuit violates drc-702 because the symbol pin name “module” contains a reserved
Verilog keyword.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-703, the Verify tool reports each pin connected to the same net that does
not have the same VHDL data type. For example drc-703 is violated if two pins are joined by
the same net but one pin has a VHDL data type of BIT and the other pin has a VHDL data type
of STD_LOGIC.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-704, the Verify tool reports each output type port symbol that is read by
another design object. For example a circuit that connects an output type port symbol to an input
pin via wire violates drc-704.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-705, the Verify tool reports each component that is missing a simulation
model.
Message
drc-705 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>] No Mapping File found
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-706, the Verify tool reports any mismatch between a block symbol pin
type and the corresponding child schematic port’s direction including missing or additional
ports.
Message
drc-706 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Pin Type
mismatch: symbol=<pintype>, schematic=<porttype>
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Type [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Description
When you enable drc-707, the Verify tool reports each bidirectional pin connected to a net with
a different name.
If this condition exists in the design, the design entry tool reports the following error when you
export a VHDL netlist:
ERROR: Hier Pin Name '<portname>' on hierarchical bidirectional pin does not match
attached Net name '<netname>'
Message
drc-707 - [schematic: <schematicname>, block: <blockname>, pin: <pinname>] Bidirectional
Pin <pinname> is connected to net <netname>.
Where:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-708, the Verify tool reports each symbol pin type that does not match the
port type of the associated model.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Verify Dialog Box
Verilog File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Verilog Model [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL Def Value [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
VHDL File [PADS Schematic Design Properties Glossary]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
HDL Checks Rules Group
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Links Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-820, the Verify tool reports each link that does not point to at least one
other link.
Message
drc-820 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] The link does not point
anywhere
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-820 because the MyUndefinedBlock link is not associated with any
other links in the design.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Links Rules Group
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Link to a Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Description
When you enable drc-821, the Verify tool reports each link that does not have a Name property
value.
Message
drc-821 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] The link must be given
a name
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-821 because the link has no Name property value.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Link to a Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Links Rules Group
Description
When you enable drc-822, the Verify tool reports each link that points to multiple links of the
same name.
Message
drc-822 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] The link points to
multiple destinations
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-822 because the link points to multiple links.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Link to a Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
Description
When you enable drc-823, the Verify tool reports each link that connects to a net with a
different name.
Message
drc-823 - [schematic: <schematicname>, component: <componentid>] The Link is connected
to a net with different name '<netname>'
Where:
Example
This circuit violates drc-823 because the link LinkWithFanout is connected to a net with
different name MyFlatNet.
Related Topics
Setting Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Adding a Link to a Sheet [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
o ? — the interpreter looks for a match of the atom, or the null string.
• An atom is a regular expression in parentheses, which can contain any of the following:
o a range
o . (causes the interpreter to match any single character)
o ^ (causes the interpreter to match the null string at the beginning of the input string)
o $ (causes the interpreter to match the null string at the end of the input string)
o a \ followed by a single character (causes the interpreter to match that character)
o or a single character with no other significance (causes the interpreter to match that
character)
• A range is a sequence of characters enclosed in brackets ([]). The interpreter normally
matches any single character from the sequence. If the sequence begins with ^, the
interpreter matches any single character not from the rest of the sequence. A hyphen (-)
separating two characters in the sequence is shorthand for the full list of ASCII
characters between them (for example, [0-9] matches any decimal digit). To include a
literal ] in the sequence, make it the first character (following a possible ^). To include a
literal - in the sequence, make it the first or last character.
Related Topics
Verify Dialog Box
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order
o The interpreter chooses the match in the earliest part of the input string, in the first
chosen part.
o If there is more than one choice, the interpreter makes the next choice in the same
manner by looking at the earliest possibility, subject to the decision on the first
choice.
For example, (ab|a)b*c could match abc in one of two ways. The first choice is between ab and
a. Since ab is earlier, and does lead to a successful overall match, the interpreter chooses ab.
Since the b is already spoken for, the b* must match its last possibility-the empty string-since it
must respect the earlier choice.
In the particular case where no |'s are present and there is only one *, +, or ?, the result is that the
interpreter chooses the longest possible match. So ab*' presented with an input string xabbbby,
matches abbbb. Note that if ab* is tried against xabyabbbz, it matches ab just after x, due to the
begins-earliest rule. (In effect, the decision on where to start the match is the first choice made
by the interpreter, hence subsequent choices must respect the decision even if this leads the
interpreter to less-preferred alternatives.)
Related Topics
Verify Dialog Box
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
These .ini files use XML formatting. If you or an administrator has the proper file permissions,
you can modify the \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini file to
reconfigure the initial Verify defaults for anyone invoking the tool from \<install_dir>\
<release>\SDD_HOME\...
The search order is a little different with an integrated project type that uses concurrent design
in comparison to a design that is not a concurrent design. In a concurrent design, it is not
desirable for each user’s local Verify settings to be saved to the same Verify.ini file located in
the concurrent design project directory. To prevent users from overwriting each other’s local
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order
Verify settings, the tool saves each user’s Verify settings in a unique location in the first
writeable WDIR found along the search path, designated as the following:
\<1st_writeable_WDIR_path>\<release>\config\<unique_id>\Verify.ini
1. \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini
2. %WDIR%\<path1>;%WDIR%\<path2>;%WDIR%\<path3>
The Verify tool loads and merges .ini file content and compares, key by key, whether a
new value is found. Then the tool overwrites the existing one.
3. \<project_dir>\NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini (Netlist project)
4. \<project_dir>\NetlistVerify.ini (Netlist project - Locally saved settings)
Note: Only settings that differ from the VerifyDefaults.ini orNetlistVerifyDefaults.ini
settings appear in your local NetlistVerify.ini file.
Verify Tool Search Order for an Integrated Project (No Current Design)
For a PADS Integrated project type that does not use the Remote Server Configuration Manager
(RSCM), the Verify tool checks the following files in the order listed:
1. \<install_dir>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini
2. %WDIR%\<path1>;%WDIR%\<path2>;%WDIR%\<path3>
The Verify tool uses the first VerifyDefaults.ini file found in this path.
3. \<project_dir>\VerifyDefaults.ini
4. \<project_dir>\Verify.ini - Locally saved settings
Note
Only settings that differ from the VerifyDefaults.ini settings appear in your local
Verify.ini file.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order
2. %WDIR%\<path1>;%WDIR%\<path2>;%WDIR%\<path3>
Integrated project — The Verify tool uses the first VerifyDefaults.ini file found in this
path.
3. \<first_writeableWDIR>\config\<unique_id>\Verify.ini (Integrated project - Locally
saved settings)
Note
Only settings that differ from the VerifyDefaults.ini settings appear in your local
Verify.ini file.
Example 6-1. DRC Verify Tool File Precedence Order (Concurrent Design)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC
Example 6-2. DRC Verify Tool File Precedence Order (Non-Concurrent Project)
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC
Related Topics
Verify Dialog Box
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
VerifyDefaults.ini Prerequisites for Verify DRC
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Appendix A
Supplemental Information
Figure A-1 shows the default colors you can choose to assign to an object.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Design Entry Tool COLORS Element
Note
Each object type uses the color defined in Setup > Settings menu item, Display (category),
Objects (subcategory), and the DxDesigner.xml file if the Color property (on that object) is
set to Automatic as shown in Figure A-2. Otherwise, each selected object color can be set
individually in the Properties window.
Figure A-2. Choosing Automatic Color Property Value in the Properties Window
The color choices are translated to a hex value in the DxDesigner.xml file. The hex value
defines the Red, Green, and Blue intensities to make up each unique color value. The following
example defines a value of black. The first two numbers following the 0x are the intensity
setting for Red (00, meaning no Red color), the next two are for green, the final two are for blue.
To help with converting colors from pre-Release 2007 PADS Designer designs, the COLORS
element definition section of the DxDesigner.xml file is divided into two sections, one for
SCREEN and one for PRINTER to correspond with pre-Release 2007 color settings as shown in
Figure A-3. When converting a pre-Release design to the current Release, this DxDesigner.xml
section helps to map the old settings to a new value set (or maintain the original defaults).
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Design Entry Tool COLORS Element
In addition to the default colors, you can define your own custom colors by clicking the Other
button from the color palette to bring up the Color dialog box.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
HyperLynx LineSim - Passives Prefixes - Models Usage
The property SIM_MODEL_FILE is used to connect a simulation model file with the symbol in
the design capture tool. The property SIM_MODEL names the model in a simulation model
file. If these two properties are not present, LineSim uses the Part Name property to identify the
model file with .sp at the end of the filename.
For example, you might use the SIM_MODEL_FILE property to identify a SPICE or
Touchstone model file for a connector component.
When the models are changed in HyperLynx®, importing from HyperLynx using HyperLynx
LineSim, the SIM_MODEL_FILE and SIM_MODEL properties are changed to the new value.
Related Topics
Exporting to HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Importing From HyperLynx With HyperLynx LineSim [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Description
Pins can represent either a single electrical connection point, multiple electrical connection
points, or a bus pin. The following table defines the available pin type definitions and direction
that appear in the Symbol Editor Pins window.
Table A-1. Pin (Port) Types Used in the Symbol Editor
Pin (Port) Type Description
IN (Input) Digital input pins.
OUT (Output) Digital output pins that are not TRI (Tristate), OEM (Open emitter), or
OCL (Open collector).
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Property Editing Rules
Table A-1. Pin (Port) Types Used in the Symbol Editor (cont.)
Pin (Port) Type Description
BI (Bidirectional or Digital pins that are both input and output (process input and output
Bidir) signals).
TRI (Tristate) Digital three-state output pin.
OCL (Open Open collector output pin.
collector)
OEM (Open emitter) Emitter coupled logic (ECL) output pin.
POWER Supply pin, typically used for power pins on symbols (positive and
negative rails). Apply this pin type to positive and negative tap
symbols.
GROUND Ground pin, typically used for ground pins on symbols. Apply this pin
type to ground tap symbols.
ANALOG Pin used for analog devices and for analog pins on digital devices (for
example, DAC output pins and ADC input pins).
TERMINAL Terminal pin for VHDL-AMS (Analog Mixed Signal).
Unknown symbol pin Pin that requires a pin (port) type association.
type
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters
You control property and value visibility with the following order of precedence, with “1”
having the highest precedence and “3” the lowest:
In a netlist project, you create and edit properties with the Property Definition Editor (choose
Tools > Property Definition Editor menu item). For more information see “Property
Definitions in a Netlist Project” in the PADS Schematic Design User’s Guide.
Related Topics
Properties Window
MY_L=10
MY_W=20
If you specify more than one parameter on the same line, enclose each parameter in quotes. For
example:
"MY_L=10","MY_W=20"
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters
For SPICE, numbers can be suffixed with one of the following letters, using upper-case or
lower-case, to provide magnitude scaling:
f - 1E-15
p - 1E-12
n - 1E-9
u - 1E-6
mil - 25.4E-6
m - 1E-3
k - 1E+3
meg - 1E+6
g - 1E+9
t - 1E+12
More complex expressions can be defined for parameters, including mathematical operators (+,-
,*,/) parenthetic grouping, and references to other parameters. For example, the following is a
valid parameter definition:
MY_PARM=(10.5p+@MY_OTHER_PARM)*2
References to other parameters must include a @ prefix before the parameter name. Note that
parameters can be passed down multiple levels of hierarchy by explicitly including a reference
to the upper-level parameter in a Parameter Value text property attached to an instance of a
lower-level circuit. For example:
MY_PARM_2=@MY_PARM
In this case, @MY_PARM refers to the parameter passed in to the circuit containing an instance
of the lower-level circuit, and MY_PARM_2 defines a new parameter for the lower-level circuit
using the value of MY_PARM passed from above. If desired, the same name can be used for
both.
When defining parameters, additional white space can be inserted into the expression to
improve readability. Parameter names are case-insensitive.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Using Parameters in Verilog
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Objects
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Using Parameters in Verilog
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
The schematic in Figure A-4 contains a single instance of a block named lower and has a
Parameter Value text property attached which defines three parameters: RISE, FALL, and OFF.
Assume that the pins of the instance are connected to nets of the same names as the pins. When
this instance is netlisted, the following results:
SPICE:
Xlower1 In1 In2 Out1 Out2 lower RISE=5 FALL=6 OFF=7
Verilog:
lower lower1 (.In1(In1), .In2(In2), .Out1(Out1), .Out2(Out2));
defparam lower1.RISE=5;
defparam lower1.FALL=6;
defparam lower1.OFF=7;
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Using Parameters in Verilog
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
The schematic shown in Figure A-5 is the block definition for the lower block instance used in
the previous figure. It contains two Verilog primitive gates, a buffer 'buf' and an inverter 'not.'
The buffer 'buf' has a Parameter value which specifies a propagation delay for the gate. The
inverter 'not' has a Parameter value which specifies the drive strength for the gate. Finally, the
wire connected to port Out2 has a Parameter value which specifies rising, falling, and turn-off
propagation delay for the wire.
The following results would be obtained from the Verilog netlister for this schematic block:
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Using Parameters in Verilog
Note
Parameters used in a schematic block will be defined in the corresponding Verilog module
with a default value of zero. In order to prevent potential simulation errors, always override
the default values with specific values attached to each instance of the schematic block.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Using Parameters in Verilog
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed
The architecture is then written, declaring signals that are only visible within the block, any
needed temporary signals, and any needed component declarations. Then a component
instantiation is written for each instance of each component using the port mapping from the
component pin name to the block net name.
Temporary signals are sometimes necessary because VHDL does not allow the direct
connection of certain pin types to other pin types. The temporary signals provide a layer of
indirection that satisfies the VHDL semantics.
VHDL requires that the Hier Pin Name of a hierarchical bidirectional pin match the Net Name
of the net connected to the pin.
A project file that contains the location of the Remote Server Configuration Manager and
needed configuration files is required.
Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL
Example VHDL Netlist Output File
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Example VHDL Netlist Output File
-- File : E:\scott\1405test\vhdltest1\genhdl\sbk\sample.vhd
-- CDB : E:\scott\1405test\vhdltest1\sample.cdb
-- By : CDB2VHDL Netlister version 15.0.0.0
-- Time : Mon January 27 11 14:46:27 2014
-- Entity/architecture declarations
use work.all;
library IEEE;
use IEEE.std_logic_1164.all;
entity bottom is
port(
P1 : out BIT;
P2 : out BIT;
X : in BIT;
Y : in BIT;
Z : in BIT
);
end bottom;
architecture bottom of bottom is
-- Component declarations
component INV
port(
A : in BIT;
O : out BIT
);
end component;
-- Signal declarations
signal cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 : BIT;
begin
-- Signal assignments
cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 <= Y after 0 ns;
-- Component instances
XCMP1 : INV
port map(
A => X,
O => P1
);
XCMP3 : INV
port map(
A => cdb2vhdl_tmp_1,
O => P2
);
XCMP6 : INV
port map(
A => Z,
O => cdb2vhdl_tmp_1
);
end bottom;
use work.all;
library IEEE;
use IEEE.std_logic_1164.all;
entity top is
port(
A : in std_ulogic;
B : in std_ulogic;
C : in std_ulogic;
D : in std_ulogic;
ZZZ : out std_ulogic
);
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Example VHDL Netlist Output File
end top;
architecture top of top is
-- Component declarations
component bottom
port(
P1 : out BIT;
P2 : out BIT;
X : in BIT;
Y : in BIT;
Z : in BIT
);
end component;
component TRISTA
port(
O : out BIT;
E : in BIT;
A : in BIT
);
end component;
component AND3
port(
A : in BIT;
B : in BIT;
C : in BIT;
O : out BIT
);
end component;
component INV
port(
A : in BIT;
O : out BIT
);
end component;
component AND2
port(
O : out BIT;
A : in BIT;
B : in BIT
);
end component;
-- Signal declarations
signal AAA : std_ulogic;
signal ABC : BIT;
signal cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 : BIT;
signal XSIG010010 : BIT;
signal XSIG010013 : BIT;
signal XSIG010017 : BIT;
signal XYZ0 : BIT;
begin
-- Signal assignments
AAA <= A after 0 ns;
cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 <= '0';
-- Component instances
lower : bottom
port map(
P1 => ABC,
P2 => XSIG010010,
X => XYZ0,
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
The QCV Netlist Output Format
Y => XSIG010013,
Z => cdb2vhdl_tmp_1
);
XCMP4 : TRISTA
port map(
To_stdulogic(O) => ZZZ,
E => XSIG010013,
A => XSIG010017
);
XCMP2 : AND3
port map(
A => ABC,
B => XSIG010010,
C => To_bit(D),
O => XSIG010017
);
XCMP3 : INV
port map(
A => To_bit(C),
O => XSIG010013
);
XYZ0_1 : AND2
port map(
O => XYZ0,
A => To_bit(AAA),
B => To_bit(B)
);
end top;
Related Topics
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed
• NET
• PIN
FIELD2 - Is the colon character (“:”)
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Search Query Syntax
Related Topics
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Search Query Syntax
The - (not) character is only considered a special character if it is used as the first
character of a text string.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Search Query Syntax
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches
Related Topics
Parts and Components Overview [PADS Schematic Design User's Guide]
Search for Objects in a Design or Components in a Library [PADS Schematic Design User's
Guide]
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Related Topics
Databook Window
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Note
To search for components using wildcards, the database is required to contain string data
and the “like” operator must be used.
• Percent sign (%) which represents any of zero or more (multiple) characters.
For example:
o string% — Matches any value beginning with string.
o %string — Matches any value ending with string.
• Underscore (_) which represents any individual character.
For example:
o string_ — Matches string followed by one character.
o _string — Matches any two characters followed by string.
Use the question mark (?) wildcard symbol to match a single character and the asterisk (*)
wildcard symbol to match multiple characters in your database library search.
Note
Databook does not support question mark (?) and asterisk (*) wildcard symbols when
connected to PADS Library Tools through EDM Library Connector.
For example, using RESISTO? as a search string only yields RESISTOR whereas RESISTO*
yields a list of all parts in the database that include the RESISTO string (such as RESISTOR and
RESISTOR123).
Related Topics
Databook Window
Databook Window - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Supplemental Information
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Third-Party Information
Open source and third-party software may be included in the System Design products.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
Note - Viewing PDF files within a web browser causes some links not to function. Use HTML for full navigation.
End-User License Agreement
with EDA Software Supplemental Terms
Use of software (including any updates) and/or hardware is subject to the End-User License Agreement together with the
Mentor Graphics EDA Software Supplement Terms. You can view and print a copy of this agreement at:
mentor.com/eula